Home

Korg Speaker System Speaker System User Manual

1. Arpeggiator P7 _ Master Effect 1 2 PO ul Insert Effect 1 5 P8 AUDIO OUTPUT o MasterEQ P9 LMONO H Track 4 Setup parameters Musical data __ Track 5 Setup parameters Musical data gt Track Track 6 Setup parameters Musical data Track 7 Setup parameters Musical data H Insert Effect Track 8 Setup parameters Musical data H Master Effect Individual Outputs Track 16 Setup parameters Musical data gt Master Track Tempo time signature data gt AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 61 Basic functions Sequencer mode Playback Playing a song Play When you wish to playback song data on the sequencer you must first record song data or load or dump song data into the TRITON To load song data from a floppy disk etc use Disk mode In Sequencer mode press P0 Play REC Use Song No and name to select the desired song p 64 Press the START STOP key The song you selected in step will begin playing he Pressing the START STOP key in pages other than Sequencer mode P1 Cue List or P5 Pattern RPPR will start song playback When the START STOP key is pressed in P1 Cue List the currently selected cue list will b
2. Select the demonstration song Press the Song No and name area to highlight the song name Song No and SEQUENCER P Play REC Program T 1 08 aa name 001 01 000 Meter 174 D S000 Deep Cut Popup button 1 4952 Psycho Kit Ch 41 RPPR Nofissign 1 El 3 E 5 rd E 15 gt Ga Drums _ Vocal Bank Progra To select the first song press numeric key 0 and press the ENTER key To select the second song press numeric key 1 and press the ENTER key ES You can select songs from a popup menu Press the popup button for Song No and name to access the popup menu In the LCD screen press the song that you wish to play The popup menu will close and the song you pressed will be selected Press the front panel START STOP key START STOP The LED will blink and the selected song will play If you wish to stop playback press the START STOP key once again 19 Quick Start Listening to a demo song 3 Playing a cue list Here s how to playback the demonstration cue list A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in suc cession and specify the number of times that each song will be repeated Press the MENU key The LCD screen will show a list of the pages in Sequencer mode Press either P1 Cue List or numeric key 1 The P1 Cue List page will appear Press the START STOP key To stop playback press the
3. 005 51 P9 Edit Master Effect Master Effect settings 005 51 More about Alternate Modulation 51 Combination mode eeeee0e 52 Pages in Combination mode 5 52 Playing a combination 000 e eee 52 PO Play e r a e a eh ale ees 52 How a combination is structured 53 Basic combination editing 06 53 P1 Edit Program Mixer Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume 54 P2 Edit Trk Param Settings for status MIDI channel and playing MOE ii see siete St bad OE a oe Oe rnd 55 P3 Edit MIDI Filter MIDI filter settings 0085 56 P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Layer split and velocity switch settings 56 P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings 57 P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert Effect settings 0005 57 P9 Edit Master Effect Master Effect settings 005 57 Sequencer mode e2eeeeees 58 Features of the sequencer 000 00000 58 About each page in Sequencer mode 60 The structure of Sequencer mode 60 SONGS eis vasa nhs See daa aie eats oe 60 Patterns 023635 2h Behe ee hed 61 Cue Distans noaa e aa A es e N Ga oe elt 61 Playpack pii Pettey Saha He ee LY 62 Playing a song Play 00 c eee ee 62 Other playback 5 6 i004 bide aoe be eee 62 Recording sireni Sie ted oino Pe eka ees 63 Recording on a track and record
4. About GM GS XG The TRITON supports the GM standard It also sup ports the GM2 sound map including bank select with 256 programs and 9 drum programs provided in ROM banks G g 1 g 9 and g d Banks g 1 g 9 are GM2 variation programs and g d contains drum pro grams GM is a standard that ensures basic compatibility of sounds etc between different GM compatible instru ments made by different manufacturers but you need to be aware of the following e The GM System On message is received only in Song Play mode p 102 in the Parameter Guide GM Initialize Roland GS and Yamaha XG are specifications by which these respective manufacturers have extended the GM standard The TRITON automatically converts the GS XG sound maps to the GM2 sound map and supports some of their messages This allows GS XG music data to be played back in Song Play mode etc amp h Since the TRITON does not support all of the GS XG sound maps or messages some data may not be played back correctly When you wish to playback a music data conform to GM GS XG format or load it into a song select the Global P0 Preference tab and set Bank Map to GM 2 Converting the GS XG bank program maps to the GM2 bank program map e When bank select program change messages used by GS XG are received they will automatically be converted to the G g 1 g 9 g d bank program map of the TRITON e The same conversion is performed when
5. AMS 1 Note Number Intensity 00 ams2 p usev cc a1 Intensity 88 MIDI Tempo Sync pz Frequency MIDI 7Tempo Sync Base note gt Times l LFOL OSC 1 2 LFO 1 2 Waveform selects the type of LFO You can choose from a variety of waveforms including standard waveforms such as Triangle Saw Square and Sine as well as Step or Random waveforms that produce a sample and hold effect p 20 in the Parameter Guide A wide range of variations can also be produced using the Offset Fade and Delay parameters and by changing the sign of the Intensity parameters in P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Filter and P4 Edit Amp Fre quency sets the speed of the LFO Frequency Modulation AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed This lets you change the LFO speed by operating a controller or by the EG or Keyboard Track settings Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync If MIDI Tempo Sync is checked the Frequency setting will be ignored and the LFO will synchronize to the tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer This lets you produce vibrato wah auto pan or tremolo that is synchronized to the playback speed of the arpeggiator P7 Edit arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings Here you can make arpeggiator settings p 96 P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert Effect settings Here you can select insert effects and make settings for them You can also spec
6. At the point at which you wish to begin recording press the REC WRITE key Recording will begin Play the keyboard and oper ate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you finish recording press the REC WRITE key Recording will end playback will continue Instead of pressing the REC WRITE switch in steps and you can use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Set the Global P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign to Song Punch In Out p 125 Press the START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the loca tion that you specified in step Auto punch in Make the necessary settings in Preparations for recording In the Preferences tab Recording Setup select Auto Punch In Recor eg Sete Cheer write GR me Pact i Ti Deer h p Lanp Al Traci Hena Pumch i In M_ M__ specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M005 M008 recording will occur only from measure 5 to measure 8 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record you
7. a KO RG MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMEIER o o 13 AUDIO OUTPUT Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp or mixer In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs the TRITON provides four individual audio outputs The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insertion effect can be freely routed to any output p 107 MAIN L MONO R These are unbalanced phone jacks p 135 These are the main audio output jacks By setting Bus Select to L R the output from an oscillator an insertion effect an individual drum part or the metronome can be output to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks When making connections in stereo use L MONO and R When making con nections in mono use the L MONO jack INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 These are unbalanced phone jacks p 135 These are individual independent audio output jacks These are individual independent audio output jacks By several times to make the Bus Select to 1 2 3 4 1 2 or 3 4 an oscillator an insertion effect an individual drum part or the metronome etc can be assigned to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 jacks The output from the 1 2 3 4 jacks is not affected by the VOL UME slider Introduction Front and rear panel Names and functions of objects in the LCD screen The TRITON s LCD screen features a Touch View sys tem that uses a touch panel By pressing objects displayed in the LCD scre
8. 49 Basic functions Program mode Use DKit Setting This is valid when OSC Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the pan location specified by the Drum Kit for each drum sound will be used If this is unchecked all drum sounds will sound at the same location Preset drum kits are set to stereo settings Normally you will leave this checked Amp Mod tab PROGRAM P4 Edit Amp p Keyboard Track azz Key Low SZ Key High F 4 Amp1 Mod Ramp Low 04 Ramp High 00 fax Amp Modulation sxx Velocity Intensity 50 AMS After Touch LFO 172 am LFO1 Intensity Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume by the keyboard location you play e When Ramp Low has a positive value the volume will increase as you play lower on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play lower on the keyboard e When Ramp High has a positive value the volume will increase as you play higher on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play higher on the keyboard Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and this Amp Modulation parameter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference
9. 65 Classic Piano Bess B9 SlowSyn BG G1 Attack Piano 104 L R Piano Knob1 BOSS Piano Pad 126 Pro Dyno EP BOS6 HarpsyKorg 8 4 iC017 Pro Stage EP OD If you wish to select a program from a different cate gory press one of the tabs located at left and right to select the desired category The full name of the selected category will appear in the upper right Let s select the 03 Strings category Press the 03 Strings tab and then press the desired program to select it The program you pressed will be high lighted Press the scroll bar to see other programs in the same category For this example select A003 Legato Strings This will produce a layered combination consisting of a piano and rich strings Category Timbre2 Program Peyboar BOOS Octa AGS Arco Strings B35 Symphonic Bows AGE Stereo Strings 067 Solo Violin If you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button your selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when the popup menu was opened For this example press the OK button Adjusting the stereo position Press the Mixer tab COMBINATION P Play Bank A 0064 ModernPiano FTOZ AGGSLegato Strings 1 E E 5 7 ings Bell M
10. OSC MEX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This can be set only when BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is either L R or Off If BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is set to IFX1 5 the send level to the master effects is set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert FX tab after the sig nal passes through the insertion effects Insert effects Select the Insert Effect tab PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert FX Ik Chain Insert Effect end1 Send2 mT rs irxt eam if QQ D GG2 Stereo Compressor yb 998 St_ Graphic 7EQ IFX3 D 020 Stereo Flanger IFx4 if D 023 Stereo Phaser IFX5 D 959 st BPM Delay For IFX1 5 select the effect type for each insert effect amp When you press the popup button all effects will be displayed organized into six categories Use the tabs located at the left to select a category and select an effect from that category on the LCD screen he Effects 000 089 can be selected for IFX1 2 3 4 5 and MFX1 and 2 Effects 090 102 are double size effects and require twice the processing area of other effects These can be selected for IFX2 IFX3 and IFX4 ZZ Each time you press the ON OFF button the insertion effect will be switched on off A setting of OFF will be the same as when 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without any change E You can use
11. P1 Sample Edit Perform waveform editing etc on sam ples that were sampled or loaded in Disk mode Loop Edit Set sample playback parameters Start Loop Start End Address Loop on off and Reverse on off Multisample Edit multisamples Set and edit the sam ple assignments zone and original key etc Controller Setup Controller settings Insert Effect Select and make settings for the insert effects used in sampling note Sampling can be performed in any page P0 P8 of Sampling mode by using the REC WRITE key and the START STOP key Recording related set tings such as input level are made by the parame ters of PO Recording and these settings are valid for the other pages as well EE The selected multisample or sample can be played from the keyboard in any page allowing you to hear the results of your editing in each page Insert Effects How Sampling mode is orga nized In Sampling mode e An external audio signal from an external audio device or microphone connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is passed through an analog digital convertor and recorded sampled e You can edit the waveform and loop settings etc of sample data that you sampled or that you loaded from a floppy disk CD ROM etc in Disk mode e You can assign samples to the keyboard to create a multisample These samples and multisamples can be easily converted to a pro
12. Select the Convert to Song page menu com mand In To Song specify the destination song number for the converted data The cue list name will auto matically be assigned as the song name of the con verted data For details and cautions regarding Convert to Song refer to p 53 in the Parameter Guide 71 Basic functions Sequencer mode RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function For details on the RPPR function refer to Playing with the RPPR function p 33 Here we will give an example of how to make RPPR settings and how to playback and record RPPR settings RPPR settings are made individually for each song To use RPPR playback check the RPPR check box If this is checked the RPPR function will be turned on and playing the keyboard will cause patterns to play back according to the RPPR settings If the RPPR check box is not checked the song will play normally even if RPPR settings have been made Make track settings just as when preparing to record tracks Use steps of Preparations for recording p 64 to specify the program for the track In Sequencer mode P6 Pattern RPPR select the RPPR Setup tab In this page the RPPR function will automatically be on SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup aa 999 NEw SONG J 120 AG36 Standard Kit ro LLIAIN MINE LIKAT AINIM GGL ce RPPR Setup KEY ZV assion
13. Velocity Curve and After Touch Curve allow you to transpose the pitch adjust the velocity sensitivity and adjust the after touch sensitiv ity p 113 in the Parameter Guide The effect that these settings will have on the internal sequencer and on the MIDI data that is transmitted and received will depend on Convert Position Glo bal P1 MIDI setting p 118 in the Parameter Guide e When controlling an external MIDI tone generator from the TRITON select Pre MIDI The above listed settings will affect the MIDI data that is transmitted These settings will also affect the data that is recorded on the internal sequencer 111 Basic functions MIDI applications Incoming MIDI data will be handled with settings equivalent to Key Transpose 0 Velocity Curve 4 and After Touch Curve 3 e When controlling the TRITON s tone generator from an external MIDI device select PostMIDI The above listed settings will affect the MIDI data that is received These settings will also affect the data that is played back from the internal sequencer Outgoing MIDI data will be handled with settings equivalent to Key Transpose 0 Velocity Curve 4 and After Touch Curve 3 Connecting an external MIDI sequencer or computer etc You can play the TRITON s keyboard and record your performance on an external MIDI sequencer com puter connected via a MIDI interface and t
14. gt l Time Release Time Decay Time Slope Time Attack Time Start Level LFO Low Frequency Oscillator For each oscillator the TRITON provides two LFO s that can be used to apply cyclical change in pitch tone and volume Examples of this are vibrato cyclical change in pitch wah cyclical change in tone and tremolo or auto pan cyclical change in volume 47 Basic functions Program mode P3 Edit Filter Filter settings The filter allows you to diminish or emphasize speci fied frequency areas of the multisample selected for the oscillator The tone of the sound will depend signifi cantly on the filter settings The TRITON lets you choose between two types of fil ter for each oscillator Filter 1 is used for OSC1 and Fil ter 2 is used for OSC2 If OSC Mode is Single or Drums only Filter 1 will be available Filter EG and LFO can be used to produce time vary ing changes in the filter Filter characteristics This area of overtones will be diminished Level Level gt Fitter gt Overtones included in the original multisample Frequency pitch vertones after passing through the filter Frequency pitch Filter 1 tab PROGRAM P3 Edit Filter Filter Type Low Pass Resonance O Low Pass amp High Pass Filter 1 EA Trim EE ms Filter Am Frequency 31_ esonance Mod by AMS D gt Off Resonance
15. 68 Realtime recording to a pattern M Before you begin recording a pattern turn off the protect setting in Global mode p 37 When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the specified number of measures will playback repeat edly allowing you to continue adding musical data to it In Sequencer mode P6 Pattern RPPR select the Pattern Edit tab SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit aa 61 P 5999 NEW SONG Track Select Metronome J 120 PF pony REC Reso Hi USED IN SONG TRACK CET TI USED IN RPPR Pattern RPPR Rice sete Use Track Select to select the track The pattern will sound with the program and set tings of that track In Pattern select the user pattern number U00 U99 that you wish to record If necessary set Metronome and Reso resolu tion Select the Pattern Parameter page menu com mand A dialog box will appear Be Bae Far sieer ol DAE Lowi EE Herter a d La Come In Length specify the length of the pattern In Meter specify the time signature Press the OK button This completes preparations for recording Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Pattern recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate the joystick or other controllers to record your performance If arpeggiator A or B is assigned to the track sele
16. Input MID into the DOS extension field In order to distinguish different types of file MS DOS adds an extension consisting of a period and three characters to the end of the filename It is cus tomary for SMF data to have an extension of MID From the list that appears in the lower part of the dialog box select your SMF compatible MIDI appli cation sequencer The selected icon will appear in the Application field From the Document type popup menu choose Midi and click the OK button The item which was added to the PC Exchange win dow will appear and has now been registered Now when an MS DOS SMF disk is inserted into the disk drive it can be used immediately For details refer to the documentation for Macin tosh PC Exchange 132 Wiring diagram for special con nection cables 1 AG 001B for IBM PC or Compatible Mini DIN 8 pin D SUB 9 pin r mos o7 30 2 40 o5 50 o3 2 AG 002B for Macintosh Mini DIN 8 pin Mini DIN 8 pin ONDARON 99900000 oJ FS Troubleshooting If you experience problems refer to the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power does not turn on e Is the power cable connected to an outlet p 15 e Is the POWER switch turned on Turn on the rear panel POWER switch p 17 Power is on but nothing is displayed in the LCD screen Use the rear
17. PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Oscillator Mode Program Basic Yoice Assign Mode Single Poly oO Single Trigger O Double C Mono oO Legato O Drums Priority gt Last hoa aan Scale MENEE E Type D gt Equal Temperament Key D C Random 1_ Oscillator Mode This sets the mode of the oscillator Single uses one oscillator and Double uses two oscillators In the case of Single the maximum polyphony is 62 notes and in the case of Double the maximum polyphony is 31 notes If you wish to use a Drum Kit to create a drums program select Drums Voice Assign Mode Select whether the program will sound in Poly poly phonically or Mono monophonically If this is set to Poly you will be able to play chords using the pro gram If this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you will set this to Poly but it is effective to use Mono when you are play ing sounds such as analog synth bass or synth lead Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the result OSC Basic tab Multisample Select In this page you can select the multisample for the oscillator The TRITON provides 425 multisamples in its internal ROM memory For the multisample names refer to the separate Voice Name List Additional multisamples can be added by installing a separately sold EXB PCM series option board You can also use multisamples from the RAM memory that you created in Sampling mode
18. Save PCG command or when you wish to restore the pre loaded data factory settings from the included floppy disk You will normally use this method toload a PCG file from a floppy disk that was included with the separately sold EXB PCM series option or EXB MOSS option A Before loading programs combinations songs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns you must turn off memory protect in Global mode p 37 If you will be loading data from a floppy disk insert the floppy disk into the TRITON s floppy disk drive Please be sure to read Cautions when handling floppy disks for details on handling floppy disks p 95 If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed Before loading from external SCSI media such as a hard disk refer to the EXB SCSI owner s manual and make sure that the external SCSI drive is connected correctly and that the media contains the file that you wish to load Press the DISK key You will enter Disk mode 892K 61 63 1999 12 00 00 491K 01 03 1999 12 00 00 40 81 03 1999 12 00 00 01703 1999 12 00 00 Drive select button Press the Load tab The screen will appear and file information will be displayed If you are loading from external SCSI media press the drive select button to select the drive that con tains the data to be loaded Select a PCG file The display will be highlighted If the file to be loaded is located in a level above
19. Selecting a multisample The multisample will determine the basic character of the program O Press Multisample Select it will be high lighted and use the A V keys VALUE slider VALUE dial numeric keys and ENTER key 0 9 to select the desired multisample 45 Basic functions Program mode EE If you press the popup button all multisamples of internal ROM will be displayed grouped into fif teen categories Use the tabs at left and right to select a category and select the desired multisample About High Low You can specify two multisamples for an oscillator and use velocity keyboard playing dynamics to switch between the two multisamples This capability is called velocity multisample switching Select different multisamples for High and Low Set the Velocity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi parame ter to set a value of for example 100 for OSC1 The Low and High multisamples will be switched at this velocity value Play the keyboard softly and the multisample specified for Low will sound Play the keyboard strongly and the multisample specified for High will sound Adjust the Lvl level for High and Low multisamples to set their volume balance amp If you do not wish to use this function set the Velocity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi value to 001 Only the High multisample will sound Rev Reverse check bo
20. 10 s HOLD ENTER MENU EXIT key COMPARE key BANK keys A B C D E F G SEQUENCER SAMPLING control keys PAUSE REW FF LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP Audio outputs AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Output impedance 1 1 kQ L MONO is 550 Q for mono Maximum output level 13 5 dBu Load impedance 100 kQ or greater AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONE Output impedance 33 Q Maximum output level 25 mW Load impedance 33 Q 135 Appendices Specifications and options Audio inputs AUDIO INPUT 1 2 LEVEL MIC LINE switch LEVEL knob Input impedance 10 kQ Nominal level LINE 4 dBu LEVEL knob min 30 dBu LEVEL knob max MIC 17 dBu LEVEL knob min 52 dBu LEVEL knob max Maximum level LINE 14 dBu LEVEL knob min 20 dBu LEVEL knob max MIC dBu LEVEL knob min Source impedance 600 Q Control inputs DAMPER half damper supported ASSIGNABLE SWITCH PEDAL Other MIDI IN OUT THRU TO HOST Mini DIN 8 pin I F LCD contrast knob 3 5 inch floppy disk drive AC power inlet switch Support for options EXB PCM series PCM expansion board 16 Mbyte ROM slots x 2 72 pin SIMM memory slots x 2 for user sample memory EXB MOSS EXB SCSI Dimensions W x D x H TRITONproX 1472 0 x 436 5 x 137 mm TRITON pro 1281 4 x 348 5 x 122 mm TRITON 1074 4 x 348 5 x 122
21. 84 Converting a multisample to a program 84 Song Play mode 2 200 85 The pages in Song Play mode 85 The structure of Song Play mode 85 Playing SMF data 0 e eee ee eee eee 86 Playback using the Jukebox function 87 Saving a Jukebox list 000000005 88 Playing along with SMF data 88 Global mode ccc cececees 89 About the pages in Global mode 89 Creating a drum kit 00 cece eee ee 90 About drum kits 0 c eee eee 90 Editing a drum kit 0005 90 Disk mode 2 s20c0840964 t0eeee ands 92 How Disk mode is organized 92 The pages of Disk mode 5055 92 Types of media that can be used 92 Loading datas is si t beet Pa bene Pht 92 Types of data that can be loaded 92 Data loading procedure 0055 92 Saving datai sisal REEI see ee ees 94 Types of data that can be saved 94 Formatting media 00 e cece eee 94 Cautions when handling floppy disks 95 Arpeggiator settings ee eee 96 Arpeggiator settings fora program 96 Arpeggiator settings in Combination Song and Song Play modes 00000 e eee eee 98 Creating an user arpeggio pattern 100 About user arpeggio patterns 100 Editing a user pattern 000 1
22. Status settings re selecting a song or returning to the beginning will reset the internal Volume value to the value specified by each track the starting settings and will reset the Expression value to the maximum E5 You can control the volume independently for each track You will normally use Volume mes sages to set the initial volume level for each track the starting settings and use Expression mes sages to create changes in dynamics within the musical data of the song p 31 49 in the Parame ter Guide Volume MIDI By using the universal exclusive Master Volume mes sage you can adjust the overall volume without changing the volume balance between timbres or tracks p 120 About system exclusive messages Controlling panpot stereo position Panpot CC 10 Bn 0A vv vv value where 00 is far left 64 is center and 127 is far right When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Panpot messages and the panning will change When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated e When you set the Pan P0 Mixer tab in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode or when you re select the song or return to the beginning of the measure in Sequencer mode Panpot messages except for RND will be transmitted by each track whose Status is B
23. VELOCITY knobs and connected pedals can be used to modify the sound etc while you play p 25 In addition options such as a MOSS tone generator PCM sampling memory or SCSI interface board can be installed to further expand the potential of the TRI TON p 237 in the Parameter Guide The TRITON music workstation is a powerful tool for music production or live performance HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system The HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system is a PCM tone generator system with full digital signal process ing that guarantees pristine sound and featuring enor mous flexibility in musical extensibility modulation and effect routing Tone generator section e 32 Mbytes of preset PCM ROM contains 425 multisamples and 413 drumsamples Separately sold EXB PCM series PCM expansion boards 16 Mbytes PCM ROM can be optionally installed to add more PCM data e 16 Mbytes of RAM is standard expandable to a maximum of 64 Mbytes Samples multisamples that you sampled or edited in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode can be used as sound sources e The sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the maximum polyphony is 62 voices Filter synthesis section e 24 dB oct Low Pass Resonance type or 12 dB oct Low Pass amp High Pass type filters can be used A wide variety of filter effects can be achieved from active sounds with aggressive resonance to subtle tones using a high pass filter e Abroad range of editing parameters
24. Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the specified gate and velocity he Set the ARPEGGIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the center position 12 o clock Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation For details on how the arpeggiator operates differently in Sequencer and Song Play modes than in Combina tion mode refer to the following section note If you have moved from Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be affected by your editing In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit For this example select a combination to which arpeggiators A and B is assigned Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn on the arpeggiator the LED will light Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on However if Arpeggia tor Run A or B are not checked and if no timbres have been assigned in Arpeggiator Assign then the arpeggiator will not operate In Global P6 User Arpeggio select the Pattern Setup tab If you moved here from Combination mode use the Arpeggiator Select radio buttons A and B to select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parame ters an
25. gio patterns With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preset user patterns An arpeggio pat tern that you create can also be stored as a user arpeg gio pattern For the arpeggio pattern names refer to the separate Voice Name List Using the arpeggiator in Pro gram mode Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select a program p 21 Selecting and playing a program As you select various programs you will notice that the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light for some programs p 31 Linking the arpeggia tor to programs When you press the keyboard the arpeggiator will start For other programs you can press the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key the LED will light to turn on the arpeggiator Arpeggios will begin sounding when you play the keyboard As described in the following sections Settings using controllers and Settings in the LCD screen move the controllers or modify the param eters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played Settings using controllers Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on off When the arpeggiator is turned on the LED will light and the selected arpeggio pattern will begin sounding when you play the keyboard ON OFF E3 E The on off status is saved when you write the pro gram he In Combination Song and Song Play modes depending on the arpe
26. p 29 Arpeggiator settings for a pro gram Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the LED will light When you play the keyboard an arpeggio will play according to the selected arpeggio pattern E The on off setting is stored when the program is written Arpeggiator settings In Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator select the Arpeg Setup tab PROGRAM P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup EEk i Arpeggiator Tempo J 12 Pattern Octave _ Key Sync Velocity _ Keyboard Swing O00 In Arpeggiator Tempo set the tempo You can also rotate the ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob to adjust this The LED will blink at the speci fied timing If MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI setting is set to External MIDI or External PCI E this setting will be displayed as J EXT This allows the tempo to synchronize to an external MIDI device In this case it is not possible to adjust the tempo on the TRI TON In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern Select from preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 231 You can use numeric keys 0 9 to select user arpeggio patterns U000 231 The way in which the pattern is played will depend on settings such as Octave and Sort P000 P004 in the following diagrams show how the arpeggio will be played when O
27. rode Manual Shift 00 C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys rentis plan ay gay Track Track 1 Drums Use KEY to select the key to which you wish to assign a pattern You can also select a key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note Check the Assign check box You can make assignments for keys C 2 C8 Keys C2 and below are used for stop ping the pattern playback and cannot be assigned Select the pattern that will playback when you press the key selected in step Use Pattern to select the pattern type either Pre set or User and use Pattern Select to select the pattern A user pattern selected here must have already been recorded or copied in the Pattern Edit tab Select the track that will play this pattern The pattern will play according to the program and other settings of the track you select here If you wish to play a drum pattern choose a track for which a drum program is selected If you wish to play a bass pattern select a track for which a bass program is selected Set Mode Shift and Sync to specify how the pattern will play and how it will synchronize When you press the key to which the pattern is assigned the pattern will begin playing The method of stopping playback will depend on the Mode setting but pressing the C2 or lower key will stop all patterns For details on these parameters and on how to stop the playb
28. tions drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global set tings Save SEQ which saves only sequencer songs cue lists and user patterns and Save Sampling Data which saves only multisamples and samples Select the appropriate page menu command for the data that you wish to save on external media hotel When using Save All Save PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each tim bre and the drum kits used by the programs and user arpeggio patterns at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs E If your programs or drum kits use multisamples and samples that were created in Sampling mode we recommend that you use Save All to save the data When you use Save PCG or Save Sampling Data to individually save a program or drum kit or a multisample or sample that you created in Sampling mode we recommend that you save them under the same filename in the same direc tory When you use Load PCG to load a PCG file the identically named KSC file will also be loaded so that the correct multisamples samples will correspond automatically hotel When saving KSC KMP and KSF files and the data does not fit on a single floppy disk or other volume of media another dialog box will appear and you will be asked to specify the n
29. AUDIO INPUT 1 2 106 Audio output input 15 Auto punch in 65 Auto pan 47 Bank 13 Combination 23 24 Program 21 22 Sequencer 64 Bank Select 55 114 Base key 83 138 Bit resolution 76 BPM Tempo 50 82 Brightness of the sound 26 27 BUS Select AUDIO INPUT 109 Combination Sequencer Song Play 108 Drum Kit 91 Program 107 Sampling 78 79 109 C Cancel button 11 Category 22 24 35 Popup button 11 Chain 107 Check box 11 Combination 23 35 53 99 104 106 108 Copying combination sounds to track 68 Compare 14 45 54 59 Computer 112 Connections 15 78 112 Contrast of the LCD screen 127 Control change 115 Convert Position 111 Convert SMF Standard MIDI File data 132 Copy 63 68 Copy button 11 Create Control Data 63 Crosses the zero level 82 Cue List 20 61 70 Converting a cue list 71 Current page 10 Cutoff frequency 26 D Damper Pedal 28 118 Data dump 37 41 121 Data filer 127 Delay Combination 56 Demo song 18 Detune Combination 55 Dialog 11 Dmod 110 Done button 11 Double 45 46 Drum kit 90 Drums 45 Drumsample 90 Dual arpeggiator 98 Dynamic modulation 110 E Edit Buffer 39 Edit cell 10 Effect 117 125 EG 47 EG INTENSITY 27 EG RELEASE 27 Erase Musical data 66 69 Event Edit 63 EXB MOSS 17 EXB PCM 17 Loading a PCG file 94 EXB SCSI 17 Exclusive Group 91 EXL file EXL 93 Expression 116 External sequencer 66 F Filter 44 47 EG relea
30. D 883 Stereo Limiter IFX2 D 28 5 Graphic 7EQ IFX3 D 59 st BPM Delay IFX4 D 216 Stereo Chorus IFX5 D 256 Reverb Room as a i EF Up to five insert effects can be connected in series Make settings for Chain Insert Effect and the Pan of the sound after it has passed through the insert effect For details on the settings refer to p 109 107 and to p 26 99 in the Parameter Guide Examples of settings using the insert effects are given in Sample Mode p 82 in the Parameter Guide Manual sampling There are two methods of sampling manual and auto In manual mode sampling is started by pressing the START STOP key from the recording standby condi tion entered by pressing the REC WRITE key once For the sampling procedure in auto mode refer to Auto sampling p 80 In PO Recording select the Input Setup tab Use the Recording Setup radio buttons to select Manual This will select manual recording mode SAMPLING P Recording iiss Audio Input SAMPLING Input Level DEA BUS IFX Select L R Pan LOGG Input2 Level 127 Pan R127 BUS IFX Select P L R Recording Setup S king Setup M rence M Status In PO Recording select the Recording tab SAMPLING P8 Recording Ms s gt EEE rrr bennen sree J EA ATAT CANLA LIk ALIKI AILILLLIK LIKALNE Recording EEk A Index 001 7 001
31. LED is lit the LED will go dark That musical data will now be the data that is selected when the COMPARE key LED is dark Operations for which Compare is available e Recording to a track e Track Edit All commands other than P5 Page menu com mands Memory Status FF REW Speed and Set Location Recording to a pattern e Pattern Edit All commands other than P6 Page menu com mands Memory Status and FF REW Speed e Song Edit P 0 2 3 4 7 Page menu commands Delete Song and Copy From Song P1 Page menu commands Convert to Song and Copy Song In general track and pattern event data can not be returned to its original state Comparing song parameters is possible only during song editing when executing a page menu command Operations for which Compare is not available e Editing song parameters Including Track Name and Pattern Name e Page menu commands other than those listed above in Operations for which Compare is available About MIDI Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device The record playback tempo of the TRITON s sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine p 122 Track status settings in Sequencer mode You can make settings for the TRITON s sequencer to specify whether it will sound the internal tone genera tor or an external tone generator When Track Status is
32. REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Recording will begin When you press a key to which a pattern is assigned that pattern will begin playing Keys to which no pattern has been assigned will sound as usual for the track specified by Track Select and will be recorded he If you want a pattern to begin playing at the moment that recording begins press the key dur ing the pre count Make sure that the RPPR Sync is set to SEQ Press the START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you began recording To cancel multitrack recording uncheck the Multi REC check box in step Single track recording You can also use single track recording to record an RPPR performance Make track settings in the same way as for multi track recording In P0 Play REC check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on In the same way as for single track recording of a normal song use Track Select to select the track that you wish to record In Location specify the point at which recording will begin 74 It will not be possible to change the location if you are recording the song for the first time so proceed to step Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Recording will begin kh In the case of single track recording only the track specified by Track Select will actua
33. Select the preset combination A127 One Fin gerTVShow and play a single note Timbres will sound consecutively according to their Delay setting If you select KeyOff for this parameter the timbre will sound when the note is released P3 Edit MIDI Filter MIDI filter settings For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmit ted and received The checked items will be transmit ted and received COMBINATION P3 Edit MIDI Filter Bank A Romance Layers 1 1 AG33 Romance Piano 3 4 5 Strings iStrings Strings Strings Enable Program Change Muu nable After Touch MY Enable Damper ss aaa m Enable Portamento SW Y H H For example suppose that you have a split combina tion in which timbre 1 uses a bass program and timbre 2 uses a piano program You could uncheck Enable Damper for timbre 1 and check Enable Damper for timbre 2 With these settings pressing a damper pedal con nected to the DAMPER jack would apply the damper effect only to the piano program of timbre 2 For details on each MIDI filter item refer to p 35 in the Parameter Guide he The MIDI Filter settings do not switch the corre sponding function on off but merely specify whether or not that MIDI message is transmitted and received For example if portamento is on portamento will be applied to the sound of the
34. TA a Satr Tna Bet Bell Ma Bell Bal nk Progra soe Boo Soni jess eo21 Jeon DESA Jase Attack PiVintage liThin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Acoustic Acous Status Now let s change the program of timbre 2 to a dif ferent program Make sure that the Status of timbres 1 and 2 are set to INT Press the timbre 2 Bank Program switch it will be tethers Bai nk Prog P a ne Bleu DIED e031 gt Jess eens Sji Jaoo1 D Attack P Vintage I Thin Bell Thin Bell me Bell Thin Bell Acoustic Acous P er Per INT m Jore Be D Jee Der INT Dio off P Use the BANK keys numeric keys 1 9 ENTER key VALUE slider VALUE dial and A V7 keys to select a program Alternatively you can select a program from a popup menu Press the popup button and select the desired program from the popup menu that appears You can also select programs by category Press Category for timbre 2 The Category Timbre2 Program select menu will appear In this combination a program from the Keyboard category is selected for both timbres 1 and 2 35 Quick Start Simple combination editing van If you wish to select a different program from the same category press the desired program That pro gram will be highlighted Press the scroll bar to see other programs in the same category G Keyboard
35. drum kits using sample waveforms that you sampled in Sampling mode or loaded into memory in Disk mode A drum kit that you edit or create can be written into one of the drum kit memory areas 00 63 In Disk mode you can save drum kits on external media such as a floppy disk p 39 p 40 amp 16 C 31 and 32 D 47 D are provided for the preset patterns of separately sold EXB PCM series option boards Please use 48 63 User to write the drum kits that you create Multisample programs and drum kit programs There are two types of programs those whose oscilla tor uses a multisample and those whose oscillator uses a drum kit This selection is made by the Program P1 Program Basic tab OSC Mode setting To use a multisample for the program set Oscillator Mode to Single or Double To use a drum kit set Oscillator Mode to Drums About program parameters Just as the character and effect processing of a melodic instrument such as piano organ trumpet and strings is fundamentally different from that of percussion instruments such as drums or timpani the program parameter structure of a multisample program Oscil lator Mode to Single or Double is fundamentally different from that of a drum kit program Oscillator Mode to Drums Since it is difficult to convert multisample program parameters for use as a drum kit because the filter and amp settings etc are made with a multisample pro gram in mind
36. p 38 Linking the arpeggiator to a program If you want the arpeggiator settings written in a pro gram to be selected when that program is selected check Program for Auto Arpeggiator Global PO Basic tab 98 Arpeggiator settings in Combi nation Song and Song Play modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes the TRITON provides dual arpeggiator functionality that lets you use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously The settings in each of these modes are made in the similar way As an example the following explanation shows how to make settings in Combination mode For a detailed explanation and example settings p 39 73 107 in the Parameter Guide The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the fol lowing things e Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B wstep Independently specify whether A and B will operate step e Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B step e Make Scan Zone settings so that you can use keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B exstep 8 e Make settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is not operating and will sound only when the arpeggiator is operating exstepiO Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be swi
37. p 95 If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and you wish to save the data on a hard disk or other external SCSI media refer to the EXB SCSI owner s manual and make sure that the external SCSI drive etc is connected correctly Format the disk if necessary p 142 in the Parame ter Guide Press the DISK key You will enter Disk mode Drive select button Press the Save tab and the Save window will appear If you are saving to external SCSI media press the drive select button to select the save destination drive If the media contains directories select the direc tor in which you wish to save the data To move to a lower directory level press the Open button To move to a higher level press the Up but ton Press the page menu button and then press the Save All page menu command gt E Hide unknown file Save to Std MIDI File Save Excl Save All Save PCG f Save SEQ Save Sampling Data A dialog box will appear The contents of the dialog box and the settings etc will differ depending on the type of data that you are saving For details on each type of file p 139 in the Parameter Guide Save All PCG SNG and KSC T NEWFILE PCG SNG KSC Proaram a We Wc Mo WE WF Combination VY B c D e Drum VU rp Pattern V Global Setting Cancel OK Use the text edit butto
38. select the MIDI Channel tab Set each timbre you wish to use to a Status of INT and a MIDI Channel of Gch or the global MIDI channel G will be displayed following the channel number In P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone tab set the Top Key and Bottom Key Set timbre 1 to a Top Key of G9 and a Bottom Key of C4 Set timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3 and a Bottom Key of C 1 You can also input the value by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone ail r A AMOUULELUOLLLELAEUULOLLELALOLLOLGLONLELKLOGLOLLLONGELLLOGLOLLLELLECLLOLLOLE H II Bank C 688 As an option you could specify the range velocities so that a portion of timbre 1 overlapped with tim bres 2 and 3 creating a layer and setting Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the volume would change gradually between B3 and B4 This would avoid an abrupt change in sound between the two keyboard areas Vel Velocity Zone tab Velocity zone settings For each timbre you can specify a range of velocities for which it will sound The range of velocities for which a timbre will sound is called the Velocity Zone By setting a velocity zone you can set up a timbre which will be sounded only by notes played at a cer tain strength and not by stronger or weaker notes By combining timbres that have differing velocity zone settings you can create ve
39. the mute function allows you to silence a speci fied track Press the track 2 PLAY MUTE REC button once The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted a a CEE ee ee To cancel muting press the PLAY MUTE REC but ton once again so that the display changes to PLAY Each time you press the button the display will alternate between MUTE and PLAY Next press the track 1 SOLO button once The display will change and now only the track 1 playback will be heard In this way the Solo func tion lets you hear only a specified track If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority an i a a a aa Co DEA a Ea Ea EEE Press the track 2 SOLO button once The display will change and only the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be heard eS COE es ETET To turn off the Solo function press the SOLO but ton once again Press the track 1 and 2 SOLO but tons once each The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the PLAY MUTE REC button settings LOCATE settings These settings are made by the page menu command Set Location You can also set the location during playback by holding down the ENTER key and press ing the LOCATE key p 48 in the Parameter Guide Normally you will set this to 001 01 000 You will return to the beginning of
40. the lock function can be used as described in the following example Move the joystick toward yourself to modify the sound While continuing to hold the joystick toward your self press SW1 the SW1 key LED will light The sound at this point will be held Even if you release the joystick or move it toward yourself once again the sound will remain unchanged from when the SW1 key was pressed This is the locked condition Moving the joystick to left or right will produce the normal result 25 Quick Start Using controllers to modify the sound To release the locked condition press the SW1 key once again Ribbon controller When the SW1 or SW2 key function is set to Ribbon Lock the sound produced by moving the ribbon con troller can be held even after the ribbon controller is released When the SW1 key is set to Ribbon Lock and is oper ating as a Toggle switch the lock function can be used as described in the following example Press SW1 the SW1 key LED will light Move your finger to left or right on the ribbon con troller The sound will change Even when you remove your finger from the rib bon controller the sound at that point will be held This is the locked condition To release the locked condition press the SW1 key once again swi sw2 LE ES When the SW1 or SW2 key function is assigned
41. 00 Cn 7F e Programs 001 128 in banks G g 1 g 2 g 3 g 4 2 5 g 6 2 7 g 8 9 and g d correspond to program changes Cn 00 Cn 7F Bank select MSB CC 0 Bn 00 mm Bank select LSB CC 32 Bn 20 bb n channel mm bank number upper byte bb bank number lower byte e The internal banks that correspond to each bank select number will depend on the Bank Map setting Global P0 Preference tab With the factory settings this will be GM 2 Bank Map on p 115 in the Parameter Guide Simply receiving a Bank Select message will not cause the program or bank to change The program or bank will actually change when a Program Change message is received Program mode e In Program P0 Play program change and bank select messages are transmitted and received on the global MIDI channel These messages are not received in P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes e Program change and bank select messages can be received on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre track to select programs on that timbre track e When you select a combination program change and bank select messages will be transmitted by timbres whose Status is EXT or EX2 e In Sequencer and Song Play modes program change or bank select messages will be transmitted by tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 when you select the Bank Program PO Progra
42. 100 cents ES You can use the universal exclusive Fine Tune message to adjust the overall tuning that corre sponds to the Global PO Basic Setup Master Tune parameter p 120 About system exclu sive messages Transposing RPN coarse tune Bn 65 00 64 02 This RPN message can be used to adjust the transposi tion for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Sequencer or Song Play modes The procedure is as follows Bn 65 00 64 02 Select RPN parameter 02 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value Normally only the upper byte is used A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 6656 mm vv 34 00 is 12 semitones and 9728 mm vv 4C 00 is 12 semitones 119 Basic functions MIDI applications Ee You can use the universal exclusive Coarse Tune message to adjust the overall tuning that corre sponds to the Global PO Basic Setup Transpose parameter p 120 About system exclusive mes sages Changing the pitch bend range RPN pitch bend range Bn 64 00 65 00 This RPN message can be used to adjust the pitch bend range for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Sequencer or Song Play modes The procedure is as follows Bn 65 00 64 00 Select RPN parameter 00 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value Normally only the upper byte is used A value of 0 mm vv 00 00 is 00 and
43. 4 keys Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys For Step No 05 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys Set Gate to Legato For Step No 07 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys In Program mode select an acoustic guitar pro gram and then select the user arpeggio pattern you create here In Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator choose the Arpeg Setup tab and set Gate to Step Return to the Pattern Edit tab of Global P6 User Arpeggio Set Flam to positive values for odd numbered steps and to negative values for even numbered steps This will simulate the charac teristic nuances of guitar chording Drum pattern Here s how you can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using the Fixed Note setting that is ideal for a drum program In Program mode select a drum kit program For this example select the preset program A036 Standard Kit In Global P6 User Arpeggio select the Pattern Setup tab and make Arpeggio Pattern Setup set tings Arpeggio Tone Type Set this to Fixed Note This will cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch Fixed Note Mode If you set this to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all tones If you set this to Trigger As Played the tones will
44. 89 Intensity 00 Filter Peni Pieri J Pieri iter J Pier Filter2 J Fiera k J Mod JUfo Mod Mod Filter Type Filter A Filter B Select the type of filter and specify the Frequency cutoff frequency and Resonance resonance level Low Pass Resonance 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance Make settings for filter A e Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter in series connection Make low pass filter settings in filter A and high pass filter settings in filter B Low pass filter This is the most common type of filter which passes the low frequency range and cuts the high frequency range When the overtones of the high range are cut a bright sound will become darker more mellow 24 dB oct and 12 dB oct refer to the steepness of the cut 24 dB oct means that the gain will decrease 24 dB in one octave i e as the frequency doubles A 12 dB oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in one octave The 24 dB oct filter produces a steeper cut Low Pass Level 12dB oct 24dB oct Frequency 48 High pass filter This type of filter passes the high frequency range and cuts the low frequency range Use this when you wish to make the sound thinner However if the cutoff fre quency Frequency is raised excessively high the vol ume will become very low High Pass Level 12dB oct Frequency Resonance When Resonance is s
45. ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key the LED will light to turn on the arpeggiator As described in the preceding section Settings using controllers and the following section Set tings in the LCD screen move the controllers or modify the parameters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played amp h The ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key ARPEGGIA TOR TEMPO knob ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob and ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob will apply to both arpeggiators A and B Their state is saved when the combination is written Settings in the LCD screen In Combination mode P0 Play press the Arpeggio Play A tab COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play 4 i aa Bank A ba Keyboard 112 0o00 Romance Layers Arpeggiator Run Va Me frpeggiator A 187 A B 8th Chunk b OF lak ia i O3 O4 Daten E Keuboara Arpegg Arpega A B Prog Mixer h Select Select the arpeggiator s that will run Use the Arpeggiator Run check boxes to specify the arpeggiator s that you want to run The arpeggiator s that are checked here will operate when the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key is on However the arpeggia tor will play a timbre only if the table displayed beside the check boxes assigns arpeggiator A or B to a T tim bre 1 8 These settings are made in Combination P7 Edit arpeggiator Setup tab Arpeggiator Assign p 98 31 Quick Start Using the arpeggiator while you pl
46. Baio vis i Dias Sisme Tir ai Cih Drai 0 he Jairi lioas 130 KORG PC I F MIDI Port Properties will appear Click the Settings button Daian eta DIEG PE LF HI Pest Da Des a abhi iret a E Dh pi ae Di aioe on Pa ere 7 e Make settings as described in Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver below and click the OK button If you change the settings you must restart Windows vend oll i E Bi hl Hemen Hess r 3 D Mepa Change Tahi E dad Thang F fotos Chere DOM bet E Banh Talci ae E Minore F F Dhan Peer E Dawe E x G Pob Kas Mense r r F feskaine I pdepeeded Sdh l HIH ea C Cancel Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver Win dows For Serial Port select the serial port COM1 to COM4 to which the TRITON is connected If you wish to use the serial port for a different purpose after installing the Korg MIDI Driver you can either select None to disable the driver or Delete the driver and restart Windows If Independent Synth MIDI Out is not checked data that is output to Default MIDI will be sent both to the tone generator and to MIDI OUT If Indepen dent Synth MIDI Out is checked the operation will depend on the model of tone generator that you are using Since the TRITON does not support this function do not check Independent Synth MIDI Out Synth Out Messages allows you to select the mes sages
47. Bend After Touch Poly After Control Change Volume Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Pattern No Loop End Measure Status MIDI Channel Bank Select When Status EX2 Force OSC Mode OSC Select Portamento Transpose Detune Bend Range Delay Use Program s Scale MIDI Filter Key Zone Velocity Zone Track Name Arpeggiator Assign IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Master track Time signature Tempo When you change the setting during realtime recording this will be recorded as musical data This allows the starting settings to be modified dur ing the playback Musical data MIDI RPN data can be used to change the starting settings during playback For details on control changes refer to p 223 in the Parameter Guide Patterns There are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in internal memory and can be selected for any song e User patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a different song use the page menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multip
48. CONTROLS 1 4 You can specify the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 The B mode functions are set independently for each program combination or song The functions in Sam pling mode or Song Play mode are set for the entire mode These settings are made by Realtime Control Knob B Assign in the following pages Program P1 Edit Basic Controller Setup Combination P4 Edit Zonr Ctrl Control Song P4 Zonr Ctrl Controller Setup Sampling mode P4 Controller Setup Song Play mode P2 Controller Setup fp You can use these knobs as sources for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob Mod 4 CC 21 Here we will give an example of how knob 1 can be used to control the filter and amp EG attack of a pro gram Press the PROG key to enter Program mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P1 Edit Basic Press the Controller tab Press the Realtime Control Knob B Assign Knob 1 B popup button and select F A Attack Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select B mode and rotate knob 1 The EG attack of the filter and amp will change E If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 38 p 39 and the Parameter Guide p 48 and 102 However
49. Create iW Multi Prefe Use Multisample MS to select the multisample that you wish to edit Select the index You can also select an index by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard Press the buttons to modify the number or order of the indices and edit them To delete the selected index press the Cut button The Insert button is used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy buttons The contents of the index that was Cut or Copied will be inserted The Create button has the same function as the Cre ate button in PO Recording p 81 Creating multi sample indexes and sampling Modifying the settings of an index Make the settings described in steps of Editing the indexes Set parameters for the selected index For details on each parameter refer to p 96 in the Parameter Guide e Changing the Top Key will change the upper limit of the zone Simultaneously the lower limit of the next numbered index will also change e If you check Constant Pitch all notes in the index zone will sound the sample at its original pitch 84 e Pitch adjusts the sample pitch for each index You can use the Pitch BPM Adjust page menu command to set the loop interval to a desired BPM value p 97 in the Parameter Guide Converting a multisample to a program In pages PO P4 you can select and execute the Con vert MS To Program
50. G is unlike other banks Each time you press the G key the selection will cycle in the order of G gt g 1 gt g 2 gt g 3 gt g 4 gt g 5 gt g 6 gt g 7 gt g 8 gt g 9 gt g d G the LED will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank G g 1 g 9 g d respectively PROG BANK SMPL MOSS GM Cc E F A B D G Cas JC IC IE It I I 0D Use numeric keys 0 9 to input the program number and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can use the VALUE dial or A V keys to make a selection 7 4 1 EXIT MENU 10 s HOLD ENTER Ct Jt J C J LJ If you press the 10 s HOLD key to turn on the 10 s Hold function the LCD screen will indicate ED the ten s place of the program number will be fixed and you will be able to switch programs sim ply by pressing a single numeric key Each time you press a numeric key the one s place will change You can also use the A V keys to change the ten s place To release the 10 s Hold function press the 10 s HOLD key once again Selecting programs from Bank Program Select You can select programs from a list organized by pro gram bank Press the Program Number name popup button A tabbed Bank Program Select popup menu will appear Bank Program Select In the graphic bank A is selected The center area shows the
51. KORG PCIF Press the Out Port Setting button The following dialog box will appear Here you can select the MIDI channels messages which will be output to each port Only those channels messages whose box is checked will be output When you have finished making settings click the OK button Start up your MIDI application sequencer and drag the mouse from the of the your MIDI appli cation s Out Port to connect it to the MIDI Out of the MIDI Driver amp For details on using PatchBay refer to About PatchBay etc in the Apple menu 131 Korg MIDI Driver To use the Apple MIDI Driver you must first delete or move the Korg MIDI Driver if it exists in your system folder Then start up PatchBay dou ble click the Apple MIDI Driver icon that appears check Enabled for the Port to which the TRITON is connected set Interface Type to 1 MHz and close the dialog box In PatchBay drag the mouse from the OutPort of the MIDI application sequencer to connect it to MIDI Out Using PC Exchange to convert SMF data Most commercially available Standard MIDI File SMF song data is saved in MS DOS format You can use PC Exchange to make MS DOS format SMF song files recognizable by the Macintosh In the control panel open PC Exchange The PC Exchange control panel will appear Press the Add button The Specify application associated with DOS exten sion window will appear
52. Laten _ Keyboard Swing O00 To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the Rename Arpeggio Pattern page menu command p 38 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat tern to internal memory be sure to Write the user arpeggio pattern p 39 102 If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost Q If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the program p 38 Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pat fern Melody pattern Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 02 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 10 Set Step No to 03 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 04 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 05 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 12 For Step No 06 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 07 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 08 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 02 Chordal pattern eS rm Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key For Step No 02 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 2 3
53. Multi Sample L Arpeggiator PITCH FILTER1 AMP1 COMBINATION Insert Master Effect IFX 2 MFX 2 TIMBRE3 PROGRAM C Fx3 TIMBRE 4 PROGRAM Ixa MEQ TIMBRES PROGRAM Ixe Arpeggiator A Arpeggiatpr B TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM SS TIMBRE 2 PROGRAM TIMBRE 6 PROGRAM oeer TIMBRE 7 PROGRAM PROGRAM TIMBRE 8 PROGRAM e SEQUENCER SONG PLAY Insert Master Effect C_1Fx1__ 1 C mFx1 1 TRACK2 PROGRAM TRACK10 PROGRAM __ IFX 2 MFX 2 TRACK 3 proca TRACK 11 PROGRAM 1FX3 TRACK 4 PROGRAM TRACK 12 PROGRAM IFX 4 MEQ TRACK 5 PROGRAM TRACK 13 PROGRAM Crxs _ ITRACK 6 PROGRAM TRACK 14 pROGRAI Arpeggiator A TRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACKS PROGRAM TRACK 7 PROGRAM TRACK 15 PROGRAM e Arpeggiatpr B TRACK 8 PROGRAM TRACK 16 PROGRAM ee Introduction Introducing the TRITON You can use a cue list to set up consecutive playback of multiple songs and specify the number of repeats for each song You can use a maximum of 20 cue lists 200 songs and 100 preset patterns One song can use as many as 100 patterns The TRITON can be used as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator Perform using the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function and make settings for it Song Play mode Playback SMF Standard MIDI File data from
54. Portamento time CC 05 Bn 05 vv When the above CC is assigned as a B mode function for one of the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs rotating that knob will transmit Portamento Time mes sages and will modify the speed at which the porta mento pitch changes When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Portamento switch CC 65 Bn 41 wv When the above CC is assigned to SW1 SW2 or the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH operating that switch will transmit vv 127 7F for ON or vv 0 00 for OFF and the portamento effect will be switched on off When 116 this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated vv of 63 3F or less will be OFF and 64 40 or greater will be ON p 217 in the Parameter Guide SW1 SW2 Assign List e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track P3 MIDI tab Enable Portamento SW p 35 and 58 in the Parameter Guide e In Sequencer mode portamento time switch messages will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 when you set Portamento P2 OSC tab re select a song or SMF or return to the beginning of a measure p 55 in the Parameter Guide Portamento MIDI Controlling the volume Volume CC 07 Bn 07 vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL
55. Sample Select P Rami Sample Time 21 845 sec Sample Mode Sample Mode P L Mono Record Input Prefe Memor jj Nie J stn Meee sess T O Recording Level dB meter Recording Level dB slider Select MS the multisample MS For this exam ple select 000 NewMS 000 Immediately after the power is turned on 000 NewMS 000 will be created automatically Use the numeric keys 0 9 to input the multisam ple number that you wish to record and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can press the popup button and select a multisample from the popup menu If you select a new number the Create New Multisample dialog box will appear Press the OK button Craw Hoar Hal bieemple i oO jens To specify the name use the Rename MS page menu command 79 Basic functions Sampling mode In Sample Select select the sample that you wish to record For this example select No Assign Immediately after the power is turned on this will be set to No Assign You may sample even in this condition The sample will be automatically recorded to a vacant sample number If you wish to first specify a sample number to which the sample will be recorded use the numeric keys 0 9 and ENTER key or the popup menu to select the number A sample will be created automatically when you record A sample name such as 0000 NewSample_0000 will be assigned automatically T
56. Voice Name List 30 Press Pat Pattern Select Use the VALUE slider VALUE dial A V keys or popup menu to select the desired arpeggio pattern To select a user arpeggio pattern U000 231 use numeric keys 0 9 to input the pattern num ber and press the ENTER key p 96 Changing the interval of the arpeggio notes The Reso Resolution parameter in the LCD screen lets you set the interval between arpeggio notes in a range of Se Press Reso and use the VALUE slider VALUE dial A V keys or popup menu to select the desired arpeggio note interval Selecting the octave range in which the arpeg gio is sounded Use the Octave radio buttons in the LCD screen to specify the range of octaves in which the arpeggio will be sounded p 97 Press an Octave radio button to make your selec tion Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the pitches in the chord you played You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you played regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes or in the order in which you played the notes Press the Sort check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked the arpeggio will sound each note in the order of its pitch regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes Unchecked the arpeggio will sound each note in the order in wh
57. a SMF is loaded into a song in Disk mode VA For banks that are used in common by GS XG GS Reset XG System ON will be received to automat ically convert to the optimal bank program map for each Support for GS XG part mode exclusive mes sages e In Song Play mode when GS XG part mode exclusive messages Drum or MDrm 1 4 are received bank g d GM2 drum bank will be selected for the specified track Until this part mode state is defeated bank select messages will no longer be received for the speci fied track e When an SMF is loaded into a song in Disk mode any bank select messages in a track that is set to a part mode of Drum or MDrm 1 4 will be ignored and will not be loaded Support for NRPN messages used in GS XG music data The following NRPN messages can be received to modify the sound Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Filter Cutoff Resonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time EG Release Time Drum Filter Cutoff Drum Filter Resonance Drum EG Attack Time Drum EG Decay Time Bn 63 62 kk Bn Drum Coarse Tune Bn 63 62 kk Bn Drum Fine Tune Bn 63 62 kk Bn Drum Volume Bn 63 62 kk Bn 62 kk Bn 62 kk Bn Drum Panpot Drum Rev Send Send2 Drum Cho Send Send1 Bn 63 1E Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm kk Drum Inst No OC 6C corresponds to CO C8 00 01 7f corresponds to Random LO00 R127 About standard
58. a pattern use the P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit tab page menu command Step Record n ing For details on step recording on a track or pattern refer to p 61 69 in the Parameter Guide 69 Basic functions Sequencer mode Editing Track editing Track editing is performed using the page menu com mands of P5 Track Edit Event Edit allows you to modify previously recorded data or to insert new data Track Edit commands such as Create Control Data allow you to insert bend after touch and control change data and to delete copy insert and move tracks p 62 in the Parameter Guide Pattern editing Using the page menu commands of the P6 Pattern Edit tab and the Pattern Name tab you can use event edit ing to modify the recorded data or insert new data and execute commands to delete copy or bounce pat terns 1 p 69 in the Parameter Guide Song editing The page menu commands of PO 2 3 4 and 7 allow you to rename delete and copy songs p 47 in the Parameter Guide 70 Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succes sion For example you can create a separate song for each portion introduction melody A melody B bridge and ending of a composition and use the cue list to specify the order of each portion and the number of times that it will be repeated to complete the song You can also use this as a jukebox function that will playback com
59. allow an assignable switch to change programs or combina tions Connect a separately sold Korg PS 1 to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P2 Controller Press the Foot Switch Assign popup button and press either Program Up or Program Down Program Up will cause the next higher program number to be selected each time you press the foot switch Program Down will cause the next lower program number to be selected each time you press the foot switch 125 Basic functions Other functions Set the Foot Switch Polarity to the polarity of the foot switch you have connected If you have connected a Korg PS 1 pedal switch set this to KORG Standard If the polarity is not set correctly the pedal will not function appropriately ED If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 39 Either press the PROG key to enter Program P Play or press the COMBI key to enter Combina tion P0 Play When you press the foot switch the program combination will change Adjusting the way in which velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone You can adjust the way in which changes in velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone By changing this you can for example make the volume of the notes more consistent even when they are played with var
60. and make other parameter settings E If you execute the page menu command Solo Selected Timbre only the sound of the selected timbre will be heard when you play the keyboard This provides a convenient way to hear individual timbres that have been layered p 31 in the Parameter Guide Master Effect 1 2 P9 Timbret Parameters Program gt Routing P8 1 Timbre2 Parameter Program gt Timbres es jy Insert Effect 1 5 P8 Timbre4 Parameter Insert Effect Program Master Effect Individual Outputs Timbre8 Parameters Program gt P1 1 and P2 2 etc indicate the page tabs used when editing on the TRITON Controller Setup P4 4 Arpeggiator P7 MasterEQ P9 p AUDIO OUTPUT LMONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 53 Basic functions Combination mode amp If you wish to keep a combination that you edited you must Write it p 38 Layer split and velocity switch Within a combination you can use keyboard location and velocity to change the program that sounds The programs assigned to each timbre can sound in three ways as a layer a split or a velocity switch A combi nation can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods Layer Layer
61. be assigned to each of the 72 keys in the range of C 2 C8 If you do not assign a key it can be used to play as usual As in the example shown in the following diagram you can make one key play a drums pattern another key a bass phrase and yet another key play guitar chords all by specifying a different pattern and track for each key TRITON prox jt TRITON pro gt TRITON am Shutdown Keys 4 Pattern Assignable C 1 C2 C 2 C8 Pattern P000 Track01 Drums Program gt Pattern U000 Track02 Bass Program gt Pattern P001 Track01 Drums Program _____ gt Pattern U001 Track02 Bass Program _ gt Pattern U002 Track03 Guitar Program H 33 Quick Start Playing with the RPPR function Simple program editing Program sounds can be modified and created in Pro gram P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect However you can also use the Performance Editor to perform simple editing in Program P0 Play as well You can also use REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs to modify the sound amp h The sound that you edit using the Performance Editor or using REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 in A mode or B mode if CC 70 79 are assigned can be saved by writing the program If you wish to keep the edited sound you must write the program before selecting another pro gram or turning
62. be set This lets you easily make address settings where noise is less likely to occur when looping 82 Use the Loop On check box to turn loop play back on off When the box is checked looping will be on Loop On Start gt End LoopS gt End LoopS gt End repeated Loop Off Start End If necessary use the page menu command Trun cate to delete unwanted data that falls outside the start or loop start and end addresses iia impir ARR Kame SLi P eee bint G0 PPP R ee a a a A CO tarrii Co j Tapy a bip Lo _Camcet Set the parameters and press the OK button to execute the operation p 95 in the Parameter Guide amp For cautions regarding Save to No and the Overwrite check box p 83 A note on saving samples The grid display The page menu command Grid overlays the wave form display with a grid based on the BPM tempo value This makes it easy to make loop settings that are synchronized to the tempo Ze In the same way the grid display can also be used in P1 Sample Edit The grid can help you to edit the waveform in synchronization with the tempo Select the page menu command Grid Turn the radio button On set the Resolution as desired and press the OK button A dotted grid will be displayed Set Grid to the desired BPM tempo value Set the end address
63. byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together expressing a value of 16 384 steps where 8 192 bb mm 00H 40H is the center value When the TRITON s joystick is moved in the X axis left right a pitch bend effect will be applied and pitch bender messages will also be transmitted When these messages are received a pitch bend effect will be applied E The range of pitch change that is produced by pitch bend messages can also be adjusted via MIDI p 120 Changing the pitch bend range Control change Bn cc vv Transmitted and received as n channel cc control change no vv value Refer to MIDI transmission when controllers are oper ated p 221 and How the TRITON transmits receives control changes p 223 in the Parameter Guide Control changes can be turned on off as a whole in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Filter 115 Basic functions MIDI applications In Combination and Sequencer modes the P3 MIDI Filter settings allow transmission reception of control changes to be individually turned on off for each timbre track For the assignable controllers SW1 SW2 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs Foot Pedal Switch MIDI filter settings will apply to the control change number to which each controller is assigned Other Control Change applies to control changes that are not covered by the items of the other check boxes P3 MIDI Filter p 35 57 in the Pa
64. can be made in the same way as in Effect settings for a program p 108 Effect settings in Sampling mode In Sampling mode insert effects can be applied to an external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks and sampled Routing In Sampling P0 Recording select the Audio Input tab The parameters in Audio Input GAMPLING specify the insert effect to which the external audio input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks will be sent For details on these settings refer to Sam pling recording a sample p 78 Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the signal that has passed through each insertion effect If effects are chained the settings after the last IFX in the chain will be used Send 1 and Send 2 adjust the amount of master effect that is applied to the signal that has passed through the IFX These settings can be made in the same way as for a program p 107 Master effects Master EQ The master effects and master EQ cannot be used in Sampling mode Effect settings for the AUDIO INPUT Even in modes other than Sampling mode the TRI TON s effects can be applied to the external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks The effect section of the TRITON can be used as a 2 in 6 out effect processor When 093 Vocoder is selected you can use the TRITON as a v
65. can be saved The following types of data can be saved on external media floppy disk etc If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed data can also be saved on high capacity media such as a hard disk e PCG files Programs combinations global settings drum kits user arpeggio patterns the data specified by the check boxes when saving will be saved e SNG files Songs and cue lists e KSC files Script file KSC files listing the multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode with multisam ples KMP files and samples KSF files Standard MIDI files SMF Sequencer mode songs can be saved as SMF data e System exclusive data System exclusive data received by the TRITON from an external MIDI device the TRITON can be used as a data filer E For the icons associated with each file refer to the lower diagram on the preceding page Formatting media The TRITON can format a floppy disk or external SCSI media Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be used as it is Such media must be formatted before using it on the TRITON for the first time For the formatting procedure refer to p 143 in the Parameter Guide In the case of a floppy disk the formatting operation can be performed on a MS DOS compatible computer In the case of SCSI media you must use the TRITON to format the media kh This format cannot be executed for media that is not 512 bytes block suc
66. data that was edited or sampled e When using the BPM MIDI Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Effects are not applied e Are the Global PO Basic tab IFX1 5 Off MFX1 Off or MFX2 Off settings checked p 125 e If you are in Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes and master effects are not applied when you raise the Send 1 or Send 2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised ccceeeeee p 108 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered cccccesccsscesscesecesecsseesseesseesees PG p 24 ES The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program 133 Appendices Troubleshooting with the send setting of the timbre track Cannot record a sample Are one or more SIMM modules installed Sahl n A titi a lecin SRE PG p 243 Is there free RAM area ccccccsseesseesseeseeeee PG p 81 Select a different RAM memotr j 0 0 PG p 81 Delete unneeded samples ccceeee PG p 83 Save important samples before deleting them Shite IEEE S AEE E EAA PG amp p 83 Song does not playback correctly after data is loaded In the dialog box
67. for a program p 107 set IFX1 to 049 L C R BPM Delay Verify that a delay sound is being out put Select the IFX1 tab 110 Using Dmod to change the delay level by moving the joystick away from yourself Set Input Level Dmod to 100 Set Src to JS Y CC 01 The delay sound will disappear The input level to the effect can be controlled by the joystick As you move the joystick away from your self the delay sound will gradually increase Using Dmod to modify the feedback level from SW1 key In P1 Edit Basic select the Controller Setup tab and set the function of SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 Toggle Return to P8 Set Feedback Src to SW 1 CC 80 Set Amt to 30 When you press the SW1 key the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue for a longer time Move the joystick away from your self so that the delayed sound is output The Amt setting specifies the feedback level that will be in effect when the SW1 key is pressed If Amt is set to 10 pressing the SW1 key will reduce the feed back level to 0 Using the BPM MIDI Sync function to synchronize the delay time to arpeggiator tempo changes Set BPM to MIDI For L C and R set Delay Base Note and Times as desired For this example set Delay Base Note tod and Times to x1 so that the effect will be easily under standable The delay time
68. in the Parameter Guide In the Scan Zone tab specify the range in which the arpeggiator will operate PROGRAM P7 Edit Arpeggiator Scan Zone y T Scan Zone zz E Top Key e3 Bottom Velocity 001 Top Key Bottom Key The arpeggiator will operate when you play keys within the specified range Keys outside of this range can be played in the normal manner and will not be affected by the arpeggiator on off 97 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings E For example suppose that you set Pattern Select to P0 UP check Latch set Top Key to B3 and Bottom Key to C 1 The arpeggiator will operate when you play keys in the range of B3 and below Since Latch is on the arpeggio will continue playing even after you release your hand from the keyboard You can use the keys above B3 to play normally in realtime to the accompaniment of the arpeggio To change the chord that is being arpeg giated play a different chord in the range below B3 Top Velocity Bottom Velocity The arpeggiator will operate when you play notes with a velocity playing strength that is within the specified range Notes played with a velocity outside this range will be sounded normally without regard to the arpeg giator on off If you wish to save the edited program settings to internal memory turn off memory protect in Glo bal mode p 37 and write the program
69. is the L channel waveform and the lower line is the R channel waveform Use Edit Range Start and Edit Range End to specify the range that you wish to edit The selected range will be highlighted If you wish to audition the selected range press the START STOP key The waveform will play back at the pitch of the base key the key shown in gray in the keyboard dis play You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the key board ES The ZOOM buttons and the User Zero check box can be used in the same way as in P2 Loop Edit From the list of page menu commands select the desired editing command Make the appropriate settings in the dialog box and press the OK button to execute For details on each command p 89 in the Parame ter Guide A note on saving samples In the dialog boxes of some page menu commands there is a Save to No setting that lets you specify the sample number to which the edited sample will be saved At this time a vacant sample number will be selected automatically so you will change the setting only if you want to specify the save destination num ber If you check Overwrite in the dialog box of the com mand the data prior to editing will be deleted and will be overwritten by the edited data Normally you will leave this unchecked so that the data prior to edit ing will be preserved as you edit Samples that are no
70. it is best to first select a drum kit pro gram in Program mode and then edit it in Global mode 90 Editing a drum kit amp Before editing a drum kit uncheck the Memory Protect p 37 In Program mode P0 Play select the program that you wish to use while editing the drum kit Select a drum kit program from the preset programs etc If the drum kit that you will be editing is already being used by a program select that pro gram In the separate Voice Name List programs that use a drum kit are marked by a symbol M When you wish to edit a drum kit first use Pro gram mode to select a program that uses a drum kit whose Oscillator Mode is Drums and then move to this page A program that uses a drum kit will have filter amp and effect parameter settings etc suitable for drum sounds About program parameter Set Octave to 0 8 With a setting other than 0 8 the relation between the keys and the sounds will be incorrect p 6 in the Parameter Guide he The effects will sound using the settings of the last selected program ke When you edit a drum kit all programs that use that drum kit will be affected In P5 Drum Kit select the Sample Setup tab GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup EEk A Drumkit P GERRI nea Thalladbalaadbalaal pbb badh dadha dbhid Drom S 0ffset Rev Level 99 D 9991 BD Dry 2 Cutoff 00 Resonance G Attack Decay 03 pmm Low Drums
71. key zone or velocity zone so that the volume dimin ishes gradually This lets you change a split into a key board crossfade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Program A Program B I Keyboard X Fade keyboard crossfade As you play from low notes to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Program B Strong Keyboard playing dynamics Program A Soft Velocity X Fade velocity crossfade As you play with nineressingly stronger d velocity the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in 54 The Compare function When P1 P9 are displayed you can press the COM PARE key to make the LED light This will recall the combination that had been written before you began editing When you press the COMPARE key once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the sound that you had been editing Use this when you wish to compare the edited sound with the un edited sound A If you continue editing when the COMPARE key LED is lit the LED will go dark and the current sound will now be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key LED is dark P1 Edit Program Mixer Timbre 1 8 program pan and vol ume Here you select a program for each timbre 1 8 and set its pan and volume These are the same parameters as in PO Play and can be edited from either page ae Bowel 5 o
72. listed data or a song in Sequencer mode can be loaded from external media or via MIDI data dump and before recording Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode After pressing the MENU key press either P0 Basic Setup or the 0 key Press the System Pref tab 37 Basic functions Saving data The System Preference page will appear GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference Ail pms System Preference Bank Map DIE Power On Mode gt Reset 31 25 kBPs PC F Baud Rate Beep Enable pmm Memory Protect oO Program oO Combination oO Song Drum kit Oo Arpeggio User Pattern Press the Memory Protect check box for the type of internal memory into which you wish to write data so that the box is unchecked Assigning a name Rename You can modify the name of an edited program combi nation song drum kit user arpeggio pattern multi sample or sample etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations These renaming operations can be performed in the following pages Programs Program PO 9 Page Menu Com mand Write Program Combinations Combination PO 9 Page Menu Com mand Write Combination Songs SequencerPO 2 4 7 Page Menu Command Rename Song Cue lists Sequencer P1 Page Menu Com mand Rename Cue List Tracks Sequencer P5 Track Name Patterns Sequencer P6 Patter
73. longer needed when you have completed your editing can be deleted by the Delete Sample page menu command he In Sampling mode there is no Compare function that lets you compare the data before and after editing If you wish to preserve the unedited state of the multisample or sample use Copy MS or Copy Sample p 83 84 in the Parameter Guide to copy the multisample or sample before you begin edit ing it For some page menu commands in P1 or P2 you can execute without checking the Overwrite set ting in the dialog box so that the sample data pre vious to editing will be preserved 83 Basic functions Sampling mode Multisample editing Editing a multisample consists of creating indexes for the multisample and assigning a sample to each index these basic settings can also be performed in P0 edit ing operations such as deleting copying and inserting indexes and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for each index Multisample editing is performed in P3 Multisample Editing the indices To change the number or order of the indexes use the Insert Cut Copy and Create buttons Press P3 Multisample SAMPLING P3 Multisample Multisample MS P G8 New s oT mms Multisample Setup zz Index ERY a2 Oo Constant Pitch 01 One Two Orig Key C2 _ TopKey B2 Range C 1 B2 Level 00 Pitch 06 40 BPM Adj in Page Menu Cier Cut j Ce j
74. multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a program and played as a program In a combination they can be combined with preset programs and used in a song They can be used with the arpeggiator to produce interesting results for example by using the arpeggiator to automatically play sound effects or spo ken samples Multisample Index001 Index002 Index003 Index004 Top Key Top Key Top Key Top Key p Index 001 Index 002 Index 003 Index 004 0000 0001 0002 0003 Sample A Sample B Sample C Sample D Program OSC Single Double C Sampe ___ Drum Kit Program OSC Drums 77 Basic functions Sampling mode Sampling recording a sample Preparations for sampling Connections and settings for a monaural source When sampling in monaural from a mic the output of an external audio device or mixer or an instrumental sound such as guitar or synthesizer connect the source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 or 2 Ep Guitars etc with active pickups can be input directly but instruments with passive pickups i e without internal preamps cannot be sampled at an appropriate level due to impedance mismatch ing When connecting such instruments use a preamp or effect device AUDIO INPUT LEVEL 1 MAX MIN MIC LINE 0 00 Mic Connect the mic or external audio device to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to match the
75. oe oe Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted only as sequence data Pitch Bend 0 32 1 2 16 18 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 64 65 66 67 70 79 80 81 82 83 93 91 92 94 95 6 38 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 95 0 101 120 121 Control Change Program Change Variable Range CO o o o x o x o o x O 0 127 00000000000000 Bank Select MSB LSB P Joystick Y Y Ribbon Slider C Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan C Expression Effect Control 1 2 C Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft C Sound Realtime Controls 1 4A 74 71 79 72 C Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller C Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFX1 MFX2 C Data Entry MSB LSB C Data Increment Decrement C NRPN LSB MSB C 2 RPN LSB MSB C 3 Realtime Controls knobs 1 4 B assign C Sequencer data receive C All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C P System Exclusive oe o E 4 Song Position Song Select Tune System Common o O 0 127 x x When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 1 When cue list is selected corresponds to cue lists 0 19 1 Clock Command System Real Time oe oe oe oe 4 4 Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset x x O x o O 123 127 o x P A C E Transmitted received when Global P1 MIDI Filter Program Change After Touch Control Cha
76. or stereo amp Raise the TRITON s VOLUME slider to an appropriate level and adjust the volume of your powered monitors or stereo amp 2 Turning the power off Set the TRITON s VOLUME slider and the vol ume of your powered monitor or stereo amp to zero Turn off the power of your powered monitor or stereo amp Press the TRITON s POWER switch to turn off the power The mode and page that will be selected when the power is turned on The state of the TRITON when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode Glo bal PO System Preference tab If Power On Mode is Reset factory setting the TRI TON will automatically selects the Combination mode PO Play If Power On Mode is Memorize the TRITON will be in the mode and page that were last selected when the power was turned off The Memorize setting will remember the mode and page that were last selected the combination number that was last selected in Combination mode and the program number that was last selected in Program mode If another mode is selected when the power is turned on you can press the COMBI key or PROG key to select the PO Play page with the last selected combina tion number or program number The LCD screen when separately sold options or SIMM modules are installed The TRITON series allows you to install separately sold options or SIMM sampling memory boards EXB MOSS Whe
77. or track of a song will be sent to each insert effect or master effect In the pages that follow we will explain how you can make routing settings and effect settings in each mode Effect settings for a program Routing In Program P8 Edit Insert Effect select the Rout ing tab PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing aaa IF X1 St Graphic TEQ IF X2 No Effect IO all oscs t PA l Routing Use BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to specify the bus insertion effect to which the output of the oscillator will be sent This specifies the bus or the insert effect to which the oscillator output will be sent L R The output will not be sent to the insert effects After passing through the master EQ the sound will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R IFX1 5 The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1 2 3 4 or 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 The output will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 or 4 It will not be sent to the insert effects the master effects or the master EQ Off The output will not be sent to AUDIO OUT PUT MAIN L MONO R or to INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 After passing through the master effects it will be output from AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN Select this when you wish to connect the output to the master effects in a series connection at the send levels specified by Send 1 MFX1 and Send 2 MEFX2 For this example select IFX1
78. page menu command if the slave device is the TRITON If the slave device is another model you can use the TRITON s Disk mode data filer function Receive and Save MIDI Exclusive Load and Transmit MIDI Exclusive Data Using the external MIDI device as master and the TRITON as slave Connect the TRITON s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device Alterna tively connect the TRITON s TO HOST to your com puter p 111 112 e When you set MIDI Clock to External MIDI or External PCI F the TRITON will be the slave device Arpeggiator The tempo will follow the MIDI tim ing clock If you playback the external sequencer the TRITON s arpeggiator will synchronize to the external timing clock p 105 Even if MIDI Clock is External MIDI or External PCI F and the TRITON is being controlled from the external device the performance of the arpeggiator will still be transmitted via MIDI In Combination and Sequencer modes the arpeggiator performance will be transmitted from timbres tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 Sequencer It will not be possible to control the playback from the TRITON playback will be con trolled by the external device connected to the TRI TON s MIDI IN If you wish to playback the external sequencer to make the TRITON s sequencer playback in synchronization to the exter nal timing clock you must first set the same time signature an
79. panel Contrast knob to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen eceseeeseeseeeeeeees rep 9 Can t operate the LCD screen correctly e In Global PO Basic Setup execute the Touch Panel Calibration page menu command to adjust the sensitivity of the touch panel PG p 115 ED If it is not possible to select this command from the page menu enter Global mode PO press the MENU key and then press the 0 or EXIT key to access this and then hold down the ENTER key and press numeric key 2 to display the dia log box No sound e Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones ccccesseseseeseeeseeseesees p 15 Is your amp or mixer turned on e Is Local Control turned on In Global P1 MIDI check the Local Control On Check DOX cccccsccsssssseeseceseessecsseesseesseesseesesenes PG p 117 e Is the VOLUME slider raised cece p 6 e If there is no sound from the OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks make sure that BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign or Bus Select following the insert effect is set to 1 2 3 4 1 2 or If specific tracks in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode do not sound Make sure that the PLAY MUTE REC button or PLAY MUTE button is set COP LAY i sees cestscoicssccdvogeotn anona na p 62 p 88 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH EN I EAEE EEE E AR p 59 p 85 Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produce
80. pattern in a track Realtime recording This is a method of recording in which your playing on the keyboard and your operations of controllers such as the joystick are recorded in realtime This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the RPPR function to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you playback existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto the TRITON s sequencer in realtime p 64 p 66 p 73 e Overwrite With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data When you perform overwrite recording on a previ ously recorded track its musical data will be replaced by the newly recorded data Normally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of real time recording or event editing Overdub With this method the newly recorded musical data is added to the existing data When you perform overdub recording on a previ ously recorded track the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data It is best to select this method when you wish to add control data or to record tempo data onto the mas ter track This lets you record data without erasing the existin
81. phrases using the Fixed Note Mode that is ideal for drums bass phrases or guitar and keyboard backing riffs The arpeggiator is also effec tive for use with subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode the TRITON provides dual arpeggiators that can simultaneously play two arpeggio patterns You can apply separate arpeggio patterns to drum and bass programs or use keyboard splits or veloc ity to switch between arpeggio patterns for an even more dynamic performance RPPR The TRITON features a RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function In Sequencer mode this function allows you to assign preset patterns or user patterns with a specified play back track to individual notes of the keyboard and playback or record that pattern in realtime simply by pressing the assigned note Numerous preset patterns including patterns ideal for a drum track are built into the internal memory 2 channel audio input 6 channel audio out put e The two channel audio input allows you to record samples in stereo The MIC LINE level select switch and the level adjustment knob can be used to support a wide range of external audio sources from mic level to line level The audio inputs can also be routed through the effects You can apply effects while sampling use the TRITON as a 2 in 6 out effect processor or use it as a vocoder effect that joins the external source wi
82. polarity and the sensitivity p 115 121 in the Parameter Guide ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack A separately sold on off foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected here p 16 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the foot switch as a modula tion controller to select programs or combinations or to start stop the sequencer p 125 10 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack 11 A separately sold Korg EXP 2 or XVP 10 expres sion pedal can be connected here p 16 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the pedal to control the vol ume etc p 126 Contrast adjustment knob This adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen The optimal setting will depend on the height or angle from which you view the screen display so please adjust this as necessary 12 AUDIO INPUT These two audio inputs are used when recording a mono stereo sample from a mic or external audio source p 78 or when applying the TRITON s internal effects to an external audio source p 109 The MIC LINE level select switch MIC LINE switch and the level adjustment knob LEVEL knob allow you to use a wide range of external audio sources from mic level to line level AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks These are unbalanced phone jacks p 136 LEVEL knob This adjusts the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks MIC LINE switch This switches the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks
83. prevent the data from being destroyed accidentally Write prohibit Move the tab Write permit Move the tab so that the write protect hole so that the write protect hole is open is covered Inserting a floppy disk With the label of the floppy disk facing upward insert it into the disk drive Press the disk inward until it clicks into place Malfunctions will occur if you use excessive force to insert the disk Disks must be inserted gently and straight in Disk access indicator ze Removing a floppy disk To remove a floppy disk first make sure that the disk access indicator is dark Then press the eject button and remove the disk If the disk does not come out when you press this but ton do not attempt to remove the disk by force Please contact your dealer Disk access indicator e Eject button aD Head cleaning If the heads of the disk drive are soiled errors may occur during saving or loading It is important to clean the heads regularly using a commercially available wet type 3 5 inch double sided head cleaning disk For the cleaning procedure refer to the owner s manual for your cleaning disk 95 Basic functions Disk mode Arpeggiator settings This chapter describes the procedure for making arpeggiator settings in each mode For details on the arpeggiator function refer to Using the arpeggiator while you play
84. selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box use the VALUE controllers p 13 to input the number Sometimes a text edit button will be displayed In any case perform the operations directed by the message in the dialog box To execute press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button The operation will occur when you press and release the button The dialog box will close The EXIT key corre sponds to the Cancel button Done button and Exit button Write Program Text edit button ABOA Noisy Stabber Category gt 1 FastSynth To Program D AGGG Noisy Stabber Cancel Cancel button OK button amp h After some commands are executed the previ ously locked page menu will be unlocked auto matically and the page menu will be closed Text edit button When you press this button a text edit dialog box will appear Here you can rename text such as the name of a program combination or song etc amp p 38 Page jump menu COMBINATION Jump P Play P1 P2 P3 Edit Prog Mixer Edit Trk Param Edit MIDI Filter P4 Edit Zone Ctrl P P8 P9 Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect Edit Master Effect In Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play or Global modes you can press the front panel MENU key to view a list of the pages in that mode As a reminder the page in which you were when you pressed the MENU key
85. set to INT operating the TRI TON s keyboard and controllers will sound and con trol the TRITON s own tone generator When Track Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH operat ing the TRITON s keyboard and controllers will sound and control the external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI Channel of the track that is set to EXT EX2 or BTH With a setting of BTH both the external tone generator and the TRITON s tone generator will sound and be controlled rums iVocalAii Strings Keybi Status Pur DIE i MIDI Channel 04 o5 a6 when Status EX2 ee jaaa fe Keyboar If you wish to use the TRITON s Sequencer mode as a 16 timbre 16 track tone generator set each track to either INT or BTH p 55 in the Parameter Guide 59 Basic functions Sequencer mode About each page in Sequencer mode For details on how to access each page or modes refer to Basic operation of the TRITON p 12 PO Play REC Play and record songs and make related settings Select the program for each track and set pan and level P1 Cue List Play create and make settings for cue lists P2 Trk Param Parameter settings for each track of a song MIDI OSC Pitch etc P3 MIDI Filter MIDI message transmission reception filter settings for each track of a song P4 Zone Ctrl Key Zone and Velocity Zone settings for each tr
86. settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it In the example shown in the illustration arpeggia tor A is will play timbres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B will play timbre 3 Make Arpeggiator Run settings Check the arpeggiator s that you want to operate The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is turned on With the settings shown in the LCD screen for steps and turning the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for tim bres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre 3 When the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres Arpeggiator Assign are Off or if neither Arpeggiator Run A or B is checked the arpeggiator will not function In the Arpeggiator A and Arpeggiator B tabs set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program p 96 In the Scan Zone tab specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will operate The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program p 97 You can use keyboard ranges or playing velocity to operate the arpeggiator or to switch between arpeg giators A and B By setting the Key Zone tab and Vel Zone tab parameters of Combination P4 Edit Zone Ctrl to set keyboard ranges and velocity ranges in conjunction
87. so proceed to step Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key If Metronome Setup has the default settings refer to Preparations for recording step the metro nome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you finish playing press the START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you begin recording At this time if you press the PAUSE key instead of the START STOP key recording will pause When you press the PAUSE once again recording will resume When you are finished press the START STOP key to stop recording Overdub Make the necessary settings in Preparations for recording In the Preferences tab Recording Setup select Over Dub Fei Sole Cher wii ie D data Parah in MB er bub O Leap Al Treia Pil Fech in For the rest of the procedure refer to steps of Overwrite p 64 Manual punch in Make the necessary settings in Preparations for recording In the Preferences tab Recording Setup select Manual Punch In C laog ALT Tracks W Hiaml Fach in In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording Press the START STOP key Playback will begin
88. so that it coincides with a dot ted line of the grid This will cause the loop interval to be the same length as the BPM value The grid display will be based at LoopS if looping is on If looping is off the grid will be based at Start To cancel the grid display select the Grid page menu command set the radio buttons Off and press the OK button amp h The grid is displayed according to the playback pitch of the base key the key shown in gray in the Keyboard amp Index area You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard Sample waveform data editing Editing the waveform data of the sample is done in P1 Sample Edit You can use commands such as cut copy and normalize to edit the waveform data Select P1 Sample Edit SMF AR Fi gle Eii Keyboard amp Index we Eoaea e e Peer tet te Hee all Amge 5 b miei Eii Plage a aa STARTER piep pii erap The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed It will play back when you play the keyboard in the highlighted region in the Key board amp Index You can use Sample Select to select the sample that you wish to edit When you change indexes the waveform data of the sample specified for that index will be dis played Sample waveforms that were recorded with a Sampling Mode of Stereo will be shown in two lines The upper line
89. specified dynamic modulation will be controlled When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Although various types of control change can be selected as dynamic modulation sources Effect Con trol 1 CC 12 and 2 CC 13 are dedicated for dynamic modulation Effect 1 depth Send 2 CC 91 Bn 5B vv Effect 3 depth Send 1 CC 93 Bn 5D wv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Effect 1 Depth Send 2 or Effect 3 Depth Send 1 messages and the send level 1 or 2 to the mas ter effects MFX1 or MFX2 will be controlled respec tively When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated On the corresponding MIDI channels this will simul taneously control the timbre track setting as well as the setting following the insertion effect In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes the actual send level of the timbre track is determined by multiplying this value with the send 1 2 settings for each oscillator Program P8 Routing tab Send 1 2 MIDI on p 25 26 42 75 and 110 in the Parameter Guide e When you adjust Send 1 or Send 2 P8 Routing tab Insert Effect tab in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode or when you re select a song or return to the beginning of the measure in Sequence
90. that will be transmitted to the TRITON MIDI Out Messages allows you to select the messages that will be output from the MIDI OUT of the tone gen erator When you finish making settings click the OK button Alternatively if you wish to cancel the changes you made click Cancel If you have made changes you must restart Windows fed Bed p iph ol Rew age M1 et CETT hee E neps Orga G Mepa Change Toi D riai hang F orbe Chara Comm Mens Farh alert oe Fewest Hrarer F Ura Pec 5 H4 Eiroh Rey i pob Kas Parre Dr irr Fecha D pdepedend Spi HEH det pers Cancel Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into a Macintosh You can use the Korg MIDI Driver if the MIDI applica tion sequencer you use runs on Apple MIDI Manager If you are using a MIDI application that does not use Apple MIDI Manager it is not necessary to install the Korg MIDI Driver Set the MIDI output port of your MIDI application to the port to which the TRITON is connected and set the Clock setting to 1 MHz amp In order to use the Korg MIDI Driver the Apple MIDI Manager and PatchBay must already be installed Use the versions of Apple MIDI Manager and PatchBay that are included with your MIDI application They are not included with the AG 002B When the Korg MIDI Driver is used the Modem MIDI Out Port setting dialog box will allow you to specify the MIDI channels and types of mes sages which will be transmitted to the TRIT
91. the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack to be output from the AUDIO OUT L MONO jack and from the L channel of the headphones Use the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob to set an appropriate level If the level is excessive at the TRITON s input stage the display will indicate ADC OVERLOAD analog digital converter is overloaded Adjust the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob or the output level of the external audio device just low enough so that the ADC OVERLOAD does not appear i e the maximum level that does not cause an overload Connections and settings for a stereo source When sampling in stereo from a stereo mic the output of an external audio device or mixer or synthesizer connect the source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks AUDIO INPUT LEVE 2 1 MAX MIN MIC LINE tt 0 0 CD player analog record player etc LINE OUT Connect the L source to AUDIO INPUT jack 1 and the R source to jack 2 Make the settings described in steps of Connections and settings for a monaural source In Audio Input SAMPLING set various parameters that specify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks will be received e Level adjusts the volume Set both Input 1 and Input 2 to 127 e Pan adjust the panning Set Input 1 to L000 and Input 2 to R127 e Set BUS IFX Select For this example select L R for both Input 1 and Input 2 The settings up to
92. the TRITON s own tone generator will be played and controlled simultaneously p 104 in the Parameter Guide Status Gii s XG hae When you wish to playback SMF data that is compati ble with the GM GS XG standards set Bank Map Global P0 System Pref tab to GM 2 p 123 p 115 in the Parameter Guide Synchronization with external devices In Song Play mode the TRITON will be the master the controlling device regardless of the MIDI Clock set ting Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock p 122 Mute Solo function In PO Play Mix the Program T01 08 and T09 16 tabs provide PLAY MUTE buttons and SOLO ON OFF buttons that allows you play and mute tracks 1 16 in the same way as in Sequencer mode You can use these when you wish to mute the melody track and play the part yourself on the keyboard minus one play or when you wish to audition a track p 62 You can use the Solo Selected Track page menu com mand to audition only the currently selected track This provides a convenient way to hear the parameter settings and effect settings of a track p 47 102 in the Parameter Guide Insert effects and master effects Refer to About effects p 108 p 109 in the Param eter Guide 86 Playing SMF data Direct playback from external media such as a floppy disk amp When you wish to playback SMF data that is com patible with the GM GS XG standards set Bank Map Global P0 Syste
93. the function of the ASSIGNABLE Switch and ASSIGNABLE Pedal Set the function of an assignable switch separately sold option Korg PS 1 connected to the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack This switch can act as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation or switch porta mento on off control the sostenuto effect turn the soft pedal effect on off turn the arpeggiator on off select programs or combinations up down start stop the sequencer punch in out on the sequencer or be a trig ger to advance the cue list step p 219 in the Parameter Guide e This setting is made in Global P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign You can specify the function that will be performed by an assignable pedal the separately sold Korg XVP 10 or EXP 2 connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack This pedal can be used to control master volume alter nate modulation or effect dynamic modulation porta mento pitch change speed volume the pan following an insert effect pan volume or send levels to the mas ter effects p 220 in the Parameter Guide e This setting is made in Global P2 Controller Foot Pedal Assign ES You can use this as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation and use it to control program parameters or effect parameters In this case set Foot Switch Assign to Foot SW CC 82 and Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 Here we will show how to make settings that
94. the menu 13 MENU key Use this key to move between pages When you press the MENU key a list of the pages in the mode will appear in the LCD screen Press the desired page and you will move to that page You can also move to a page by holding down the MENU key and pressing the corresponding numeric key 0 9 p 12 14 SEQUENCER PAUSE key In Sequencer mode this key pauses the song or cue list playback In Song Play mode this key pauses SMF playback When paused the LED will light Press PAUSE once again to defeat pause the LED goes off lt lt REW key In Sequencer mode this key rewinds the song or cue list playback When you press and hold this key the LED will light and the playback will rewind This will not function during recording FF gt gt key In Sequencer mode this key fast forwards the song or cue list playback When you press and hold this key the LED will light and the playback will fast forward This will not function during recording LOCATE key In Sequencer mode this key returns the song or cue list playback location to the specified point In Song Play mode this key returns the playback location of the SMF to the specified point If for some reason any stuck notes occur press this key 15 SEQUENCER SAMPLING REC WRITE key In Sequencer mode pressing this key will make the LED light and if you then press the START STOP key recording will be
95. the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Adjusting the contrast bright ness of the LCD screen Use the rear panel contrast knob to make adjustments Sounding a beep when the LCD screen is pressed If the Global P0 System Preference tab Beep Enable check box is turned on a beep will sound when you press an object in the LCD screen Using the TRITON as a data filer MIDI exclusive data transmitted from an external device can be received by the TRITON and saved ona floppy disk the Data Filer function This is done using the Disk mode Save tab Save Exclusive page menu command p 141 in the Parameter Guide 127 Basic functions Other functions Shortcuts MENU key numeric keys 0 19 e Access the pages within a mode ENTER key numeric keys 0 9 e Access the page menu commands in each page up to ten items ENTER key keyboard e Input note number values or velocity values e Select KEY in Global P5 Drum Kit Sequencer P5 RPPR Setup tab e Select base key and index in Sampling mode ENTER key LOCATE key e In Sequencer mode and Song Play mode set the current location as the Location equivalent to the Set Location page menu command 128 es ee el BW artlaYataYoiFlarat _WOI liet BIS Se om K b Installing and setting up the Korg MIDI Driver Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into Windows 95 98 and mak ing settings Installing the Korg MI
96. the song When you select a song the LOCATE setting will automatically be set to 001 01 000 Other playback In Sequencer mode you can also use playback func tions such as Loop All Tracks play Patterns using the RPPR function Track Play Loop and Cue List Recording The process by which your playing on the TRITON s keyboard and controllers is captured on the tracks or patterns of a song as data is called recording Recording on a track and recording on a pattern Recording on a track There are two ways to record on a track realtime recording and step recording You can choose from a further six types of realtime recording In addition you can use event editing to modify data that has been recorded or to insert data and use track editing operations such as Create Control Data to insert data such as bend after touch and control changes Recording on a pattern There are two ways to record on a pattern realtime recording and step recording For realtime recording only one recording type loop is available In addition you can use event edit operations to mod ify data that has been recorded or to insert data The page menu command Get From Track can be used to take musical data from a desired area of a track and use it as the musical data for a pattern Con versely the page menu commands Put to Track and Copy to Track can be used to place or to copy the musical data of a
97. this point will cause the sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks to be output in stereo from the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and from the headphones The sound of AUDIO INPUT 1 will be output from the left and AUDIO OUTPUT 2 from the right Use the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust a suitable input level Refer to step of Connec tions and settings for a monaural source The AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob adjusts both AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 Using an insert effect The TRITON s insert effects can be applied to the sound that is being input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks allowing you to record a sample with effects applied As an example we will explain the pro cedure for applying an insert effect to a stereo source and sampling the result Make the settings of step and in Connec tions and settings for a stereo source Set the Audio Input SAMPLING parameters e Set BUS IFX Select to IFX1 for both Input 1 and 2 e Set Level and Pan to the same settings as in step of Connections and settings for a stereo source With these settings the stereo source will be sent to insert effect 1 IFX 1 Use the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust a suitable input level Refer to step of Connec tions and settings for a monaural source In P8 Insert Effect select the Insert Fx tab SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Insert FX E vl Insert Effect IFX1 Chain
98. timbre of a combi nation or for each track of a song Sequencer Song Play Changing the scale Changing the scale You can specify the scale for each program for each timbre in a combination or for each track of a song Sequencer Song Play mode These settings are made by Type in the following pages and by Use Program s Scale for a combination or song Program P1 Edit Basic Program Basic P2 Edit Trk Param Other Combination Song P2 Trk Param Other T01 08 T09 16 Song Play mode P1 Track Status Scale T01 08 T09 16 Here we will show how to make settings in Sequencer mode Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P2 Trk Param Select the Other T01 08 tab or the Other T09 16 tab If you wish to use the scale that is specified for the program used by a track check the Use Program s Scale check box for that track Tracks that are not checked will use the scale speci fied by Scale Type Set Type to select the scale for the entire cur rently selected song ED If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 38 p 39 and the Parameter Guide p 48 and 102 Setting the function of SW1 and SW2 You can specify the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys p 217 in the Parameter Guide The functions of the SW1 and SW2 keys are set
99. tone gen erator Track 1 Parameter settings Musical data O Arpeggiator P7 Controller Setup P2 Track 2 Parameter settings Musical data p _ Routing P8 1 Track 3 Parameter settings Musical data L__ as Track 4 Parameter settings Musical data Track 5 Parameter settings Musical data p Track _ _ Master Effect 1 2 P9 Insert Effect 1 5 P8 AUDIO OUTPUT MasterEQ P9 LMONO R Track6 Parameter settings Musical data __ Track 7 Parameter settings Musical data Insert Effect Master Effect Track 8 Parameter settings Musical data Individual Outputs Track 16 Parameter settings Musical data AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 85 Basic functions Song Play mode When the Status of a track is set to EXT or BTH the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating the keyboard or controllers of the TRI TON will play and control an external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI channel of the TRITON track that is set to EXT or BTH With a setting of BTH the external tone generator and
100. track that you wish to record Use Bank Program or Category to select the program for the track you wish to record Use the Prog 1 8 tab to select a program for tracks 1 8 and the Prog 9 16 tab to select a program for tracks 9 16 E You may find it convenient to use the page menu command Load Template Song and use the set tings from a template song p 67 If necessary select the Mixer tab and set the pan and volume The status and MIDI channel of each track are set by P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch tab Status and MIDI Channel E It is a good idea to set tracks 1 16 to MIDI Chan nel 1 16 respectively This is the default Tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when either track is recorded or played Make sure that Status is INT or BTH 64 Press the REC WRITE key The TRITON will enter record standby mode The PLAY MUTE REC button of the track s you specified in step will change from PLAY to REC The metronome will begin sounding If it does not use the Preference tab Metronome Setup to make metronome settings The default values are Sound Only REC BUS Select L R Level 127 and Precount 2 With these settings there will be a two measure pre count the metronome sound will be output at the maximum level from the L MONO and R jacks and from the headphones and will be heard only during recording S
101. when saving the data did you check the check boxes for each item that you Wanted to SAVE cccsccessecsscesscssecssscssecsssesseeseeees p 41 Are the program or combination banks numbers the same as when you created the song GD stent EAEE EE AE E EART PG p 115 Did you load the necessary multisamples and samples Playback does not start when you press the START STOP key in Sequencer mode Is the Global P1 MIDI Clock Source set to Interna ts sie octet estes dase eri PG p 118 Can t record in Sequencer mode Is the Global P0 Memory Protect Song check box UNCHECK rann annaa PG p 118 Is the Global P1 MIDI Clock Source set to Mtema ra a e aa es aA PG p 118 In Song Play mode a GM GS XG compatible SMF is not played correctly Execute GM Initialize to initialize the settings SE ROR E E PR On R N ae a PG p 102 Is Bank Map set to GM 2 uu PG p 115 Is Status set to INT ccccccccesceseeeseesseesseeee p 104 Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed Make sure that the Program P1 Program Basic tab Oscillator Mode parameter is set to Double The TRITON does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables connected correctly Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on which it is being transmitted p 114 PG p 118 134 The TRITON does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data e Are the Global P1 MIDI settings Enable Program Change Enabl
102. will affect the depth of the filter EG Normally rotating the knob toward the left will make the filter EG apply less deeply and rotating it toward the right will make the filter EG apply more deeply Since the filter EG will operate based on the cutoff fre quency of the filter knobs 1 and 3 will work together to control the tonal changes produced by the filter Level a Time Knob 4 EG RELEASE Adjust the EG release times of the filter and amp This will determine the time from note off until the sound disappears When you operate the knob the release times of the fil ter EG and the amp EG will change Normally rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the release time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the release time When the arpeggiator is running it is effective to use this in conjunction with the arpeggiator GATE knob to control the arpeggiated notes noon Attack Level Break Level noero Level A Release Level j Sustain Level gt I Time Release Time Decay Time Attack Time Slope Time Start Level B mode controls You can control parameters such as volume porta mento time pan or filter and amp EG pitch LFO and master effect send levels etc fp Ineach preset program appropriate functions are assigned to the B mode knobs The functions that are assigned can be viewed in the LCD screen The B mode function settings are made for ea
103. will repeat at an interval of a 8th note Rotate the TEMPO knob and the delay time will change When you move the joystick away from yourself the delay sound will be output When you turn on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF switch the arpeggiator will begin playing Select any desired arpeggio pattern When you rotate the TEMPO knob the delay time will change in synchronization with the changing tempo of the arpeggio A If you rotate the TEMPO knob to change the tempo while the delay is sounding noise may occur in the delay sound This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a mal function nofe For some effects you can synchronize the LFO fre quency to the tempo Set the effect parameters BPM MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details refer to p 159 in the Parameter Guide MIDI applications About MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard for exchanging various types of musical data between electronic musical instruments and computers When MIDI cables are used to connect two or more MIDI devices perfor mance data can be exchanged between the devices even if they were made by different manufacturers Connecting MIDI devices com puters MIDI connectors Controlling an external MIDI tone gen erator from the TRITON When you wish to use the TRITON s keyboard con trollers and sequencer etc to play an external MI
104. with each other you can cre ate even more variations If you wish to save the edited combination settings in internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode p 37 and write the combination p 38 The Status MIDI Channel and Arpeggiator Assign settings shown in the LCD screen of steps and can be made so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is running and will be silent when the arpeggiator is not running Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example Combination A003 Drum n Bass Kit Select combination A003 Drum n Bass Kit and play it Before you play make sure that the global MIDI chan nel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T timbre 7 and 8 When you play the keyboard only the T8 program B068 Drum n Bass Kit will be sounded by the U158 A B Drum n Bass 6 arpeggio pattern e The arpeggio pattern will use the Arpeggio Tone Mode Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup tab Fixed Note as appropriate for a drum arpeggio performance With this setting the arpeggio pattern will always be played with the specified pitches regardless of the note numbers played on the keyboard p 127 in the Parameter Guide e The A Top Key and Bottom Key Combination P7 Scan Zone tab are set so that arpeggi
105. you recorded in Sampling mode or loaded into memory in Disk mode Programs that you edit or create can be written into the 640 program memory areas in banks A E In Disk mode programs can also be saved on external media such as floppy disk sp 40 E The TRITON provides AUDIO INPUT jacks that allow an external audio source to be input In addition to sampling the external audio input in Sampling mode you can apply the TRITON s effect section to the external audio input in other modes such as Program mode or even use vocoder effects that combine the sound of an oscil lator with an external audio source p 109 p 201 in the Parameter Guide w All transmission and reception of MIDI data in Program mode is performed on the Global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is set in Global mode P1 MIDI MIDI Channel Playing a program PO Play Here you can select and play programs You can also use the Performance Editor to do some simple editing and make arpeggiator settings Selecting a program There are three ways to select a program For the pro cedure refer to the appropriate page Using the controls of the TRITON Selecting and playing a program p 21 Selecting by bank program number Selecting by program category Selecting with 10 s Hold e Using a connected switch Other functions p 125 Receiving MIDI program change messages MIDI p 114 For the names of the factory
106. you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically p 33 in the Parameter Guide OSC Select Normally you will set this to BTH Both If the timbre is using a program whose OSC Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OS1 only OSC1 will sound or OS2 only OSC2 will sound Portamento Normally you will set this to PRG If you want the portamento setting specified for the program of the timbre to be forced off set this parame ter to Off Conversely if you want to forcibly turn the portamento on or to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 to specify the portamento time Pitch tab Transpose Detune These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Ina split type combination you can use Transpose to change the pitch of the program in each key zone in steps of an octave e If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the correspondence between notes and drum sounds will change 55 Basic functions Combination mode Other tab Delay ms Specify the timing of the delay before each timbre sounds
107. 00 Dual arpeggiator editing 104 About arpeggiator synchronization 105 Effects settings eeeeee econ 106 Effects in each mode 06 cece eee eee 106 Routing settings and effect settings 107 Effect settings for a program 107 Effect settings in Combination Song and Song Play modes 3 5 2 crainn ehe sede 108 Effect settings in Sampling mode 109 Effect settings for the AUDIO INPUT 109 About dynamic modulation Dmod 110 MIDI applications 111 About MIDD Wd04 5 203 6 ohh Bas Eee tok 111 Connecting MIDI devices computers MIDI con NeECtOLS i dea peer ad annii ta eed ee ote ae 111 Controlling an external MIDI tone generator from the TRITON esas toad dna ana Sees es 111 Controlling the TRITON s tone generator from an external MIDI device 0005 111 Controlling two or more external MIDI tone gen erators from the TRITON 111 Connecting a computer TO HOST connector 000 112 Connecting an external MIDI sequencer or computer etc cirie nedrept cee eens 112 Connecting an IBM PC compatible 112 Connecting an Apple Macintosh 113 Messages transmitted and received by the TRA ON ar ats els oxen lens A An S tects 114 MIDI channels t eug eea re 114 Note on off 0 0 0 0c ccc cece 114 Program Change Bank Select 114 After tou
108. 01 001 This means that there is only one index The range that is high lighted in the keyboard amp Index is the range of the selected index Press the Create button several times Each time you press it an index will be created The keyboard display will indicate the zone and original key loca tion of each index The highlighted area is the cur rently selected index 2S The index that is created when you press the Cre ate button is created according to the Create Zone Preference settings of the Preference tab For details refer to p 87 and Create p 81 both in the Parameter Guide Immediately after the power is turned on Posi tion will be Right Zone Range will be 12Keys and Original Key Position will be Bottom so that indexes will be created as shown below Haff Oe ete g ters TST FTP T EJ If you set Zone Range to 1Key an index will be created for each note of the keyboard and a sample assigned to in index You can then continue sam pling It is convenient to use 1Key when you wish to sample numerous takes in succession such as when recording phrases or rhythm loops Hd Hi Rae a in DE Ps H pai je FUE TPH AAEL ILN b LK LLLA LA LLELE LAI Select Index Index can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard For this example select 001 If you have been sampling previously and one or more sampl
109. 34 Simple combination editing 35 An example of editing 00005 35 Selecting the program for a timbre 35 Adjusting the stereo position 36 Adjusting the volume 0084 36 Basic functions 37 Saving data 2 cee eee eee eee 37 Types of data that can be saved 37 Writing to internal memory 5 37 Writing a program or combination 38 Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns 05 39 Saving on external media 05 40 MIDI data dump 6 cece eee ee eens 41 Restoring the factory settings 42 Loading the preload data 5 42 Program mode eee ee eens 43 About the pages in Program mode 43 Playing a program 6 cece eee eee eee 43 PO Play ir che sthrete ada Rey is 43 How a program is organized 44 P1 Edit Basic Oscillator settings 0000 45 Basic program editing 00 eee 45 P2 Edit Pitch Pitch settings neroste sia cau gee es 47 P3 Edit Filter Filter sethings lt 2cctuweets aiaga dinen 48 P4 Edit Amp Amplifier settings 0005 49 P5 Edit Common LFO LFO Stings iiinn o as 2 pL 50 P7 Edit arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings 51 P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert Effect settings
110. 5 and press the 0 key Input the snare Tone01 Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 key Then set Step No to 07 and press the 1 key Input the closed hi hat Tone02 Set Step No to 01 02 03 05 06 and 07 and press the 2 key for each Input the open hi hat Tone03 Set Step No to 04 and press the 3 key Then set Step No to 08 and press the 3 key You can also select Step No by using the A V7 keys the VALUE slider the VALUE dial or the popup menu 103 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played playing a single note on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same num ber of tones Set the parameters for each step Use Velocity etc to add accents to the rhythm pat tern amp The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parame ters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup tab of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and
111. 8 MEX 34 MID 85 MIDI 111 MIDI channel 43 55 114 MIDI filter 56 Minus one play 88 Mode 3 Selecting mode 12 Monaural source 80 Monophonic 45 55 Multi multitrack recording 66 73 Multisample 44 45 77 Converting a multisample 84 Multi timbrally 122 Mute 62 86 N Note Number 28 Note on off 114 O OK button 11 Options 136 Oscillator 44 45 Oscillator Mode 45 Overdub 65 Overwrite 64 P Page jump menu 11 Page menu button 11 Pan 49 117 AUDIO INPUT 109 Combination 36 54 Drum Kit 91 Program 107 Sampling 78 Specifies each drum 50 Pattern 61 Length of the pattern 68 Pattern Edit 70 PC I F Baud Rate 113 PCG file PCG 92 93 94 Performance Edit 34 Amp Level 34 Attack Time 34 Decay Time 34 IFX Balance 34 MFX Balance 34 Octave 34 OSC Balance 34 Pitch Stretch 34 Pin 10 Pitch 44 47 Combination 55 LFO 1 2 47 Pitch bend range 120 Pitch EG 47 Pitch Tone Volume 44 Place the musical data 63 Play 62 83 86 Playing a single note on the key board will sound all tones 103 Polyphonic 45 55 Popup button 10 14 Popup menu 10 14 Portamento 47 55 116 Preload data 42 PRELOAD KSC 18 PRELOAD PCG 18 PRELOAD SNG 18 Preset arpeggio pattern 96 Appendices Program 21 Program change 114 Program Change Bank Select 114 Program Edit 34 45 Q Quantize 68 R Radio button 11 Range in which the arpeggiator will operate 97 99 Realtime control 26 27 34 REALTIME CONTR
112. 88 astSyniFastSyn Top Velocity As an option you could specify the range velocities so that a portion of the two timbres overlapped and set Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the vol ume would change gradually within that area This would avoid an abrupt change in sound between velocities 63 and 64 Controller Setup tab For each combination you can specify the functions of the SW1 and SW2 keys and the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 127 p 38 217 218 in the Parameter Guide P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings Make settings for the arpeggiator p 98 P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert Effect settings Select insert effects and make settings for them Here you can also set the oscillator routing send levels to the insert effects master effects and individual out puts p 108 P9 Edit Master Effect Master Effect settings Select master effects and make settings for them Here you can also make master EQ settings p 108 57 Basic functions Combination mode Sequencer mode The TRITON contains a 16 track MIDI sequencer This sequencer is the center to which the TRITON s numerous functions are integrated allowing it to be used in a variety of situations including music pro duction and live performance amp When you turn off the power the settings made in Sequencer mode and the song data cue list data and user pattern da
113. DI tone generator use a MIDI cable to connect the TRI TON s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI tone generator i Controlling the TRITON s tone genera tor from an external MIDI device When you wish to play or control the TRITON s tone generator from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer etc use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector of the TRITON CTL MU IUI i mn ha i Controlling two or more external MIDI tone generators from the TRITON You can use the MIDI THRU jack to simultaneously control multiple MIDI devices This type of connec tion should be used to connect no more than three devices If you wish to connect a larger number of MIDI devices we recommend that you use a MIDI patch bay as shown in the second diagram below TT IL MIDI OUT i and MIDI THRU gt Emin MIDI IN You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple MIDI devices i wi LUA LLL HU aiM i ll i I J o i MIDI IN The Convert Position setting On the TRITON the Global P0 Basic tab parameters Key Transpose
114. DI Driver into Windows 95 98 If your application sequencer is Windows compati ble using the Korg MIDI Driver will allow you to use a Korg tone generator connected to the serial port COM RS 232C as a MIDI device he Before you install the Korg MIDI Driver use the special serial cable to connect the TRITON and your computer turn on the power of the TRITON and set the Global P0 System Pref tab PC I F Baud Rate parameter to the setting appropriate for your computer p 112 113 amp If your computer is not fast enough the data at MIDI IN may not be received correctly Windows NT is not supported In the task bar click the Start button and then click Control Panel In the control panel double click the Hardware or Add hardware icon and the Hardware wizard will start up On Windows 95 click Next gt On Win dows 98 click Next gt and when an explanation appears click Next gt once again In response to Do you want Windows to search for your new hardware be sure to select No and then click Next gt E pe hedsst t drh mid ce had hee karake A Meam nebs deim b rem ham iune d miamy riprap y pple ba ha drra d ey Fammi ie s Rca eb Bed peal er a E 0 yn Pcl Select Sound video and game controllers and click Next gt Tapira ee ot hed oe mare i ete Click Have Disk Tki pa eerctectore ard mada ofl poem Pacts ee ined a f p
115. E 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 7 i 2 3 4 cs R A R DRA S OM BRO GAY 7 REALTIME CONTROLS Use the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select A or B mode for the realtime controllers and use knobs 1 4 to control the tone effects and MIDI control changes etc in realtime p 26 REALTIME CONTROLS key This key selects either A or B mode for the realtime controllers The selected mode will light 1 knob 2 knob 3 knob 4 knob In A mode the function of each knob is fixed 1 is the low pass filter cutoff frequency 2 is the filter resonance level or the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter 3 is the filter EG intensity and 4 is the filter amp release time In B mode each knob will control the function that you assigned in Program Combination Sequencer Song Play or Sampling modes Mode keys Use these keys to enter the desired mode When you press a key the LED will light and you will enter the mode whose key you pressed p 12 COMBI key In Combination mode you can play or create com binations PROG key In Program mode you can play or create programs SEQ key Sequencer mode is mainly for recording playing songs You can create 16 track sequence data Use this mode when you wish to create an original song from scratch or to add to sequence data that was converted from a Standard MIDI File SAMPLING key In Sampling mode you can record samples edit the wave
116. Edit Trk Param Set various parameters for each timbre such as MIDI OSC Pitch etc MIDI transmission reception filter set tings for each timbre Edit MIDI Filter Edit Zone Ctrl Key zone and velocity zone settings for each timbre Make controller settings If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed set related parameters Edit Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings These are com mon to the parameters in PO and can be edited from either page Edit Insert Effect Select insertion effects and make set tings Specify the timbre routing send levels to the insertion effects master effects and independent outputs Edit Master Effect Select master effects and make set tings Also make master EQ settings A If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed bank F programs can be used by the tim bres of a combination For details on the parame ters of bank F programs refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual When the TRITON is shipped from the factory it con tains a wide variety of factory preset combinations that use the preset programs preset arpeggio patterns and effects You can create your own combinations by mod ifying these preset combinations or by creating a com bination from scratch by starting with an initialized combination Your own programs that use original sample wave forms or multisamples that were sampled in Sampling mode or loaded into the TRITO
117. FO1 intensity 00 0 Fingered Time 686 LFO2 Intensity 00 aa ams Off JS Int 00 00 Intensity 00 00 D After Touch JS Y Int 01 00 Intensity 00 25 Pitch JS X and JS X specify the amount of pitch change that will occur when the joystick is moved to right or left in semitone units With a setting of 12 the pitch can be raised a maximum of one octave and with a set ting of 12 the pitch can be lowered a maximum of one octave Pitch Ribbon specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you operate the ribbon controller toward the left or right With a setting of 12 moving your finger to the right edge will raise the pitch one octave and moving your finger to the left edge will lower the pitch one octave Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG tab will produce a maxi mum of 1 octave of pitch change Portamento If Enable is checked portamento will be applied Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter specifies the portamento time As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no porta mento If Porta SW CC 65 is assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 key the portamento effect can be switched on off by SW1 or SW2 key LFO 1 2 An LFO can be u
118. INTENSITY EG RELEASE 3 will light ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 3 4 7 SR SI ToLo CFO O XV Rotate the desired knob to control the sound etc A mode controls In A mode knobs 1 4 will control edit the follow ing functions Placing the knobs in the center 12 o clock position will produce the values specified by the program parameters Knob 1 LPF CUTOFF Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter the brightness of the sound will change The effect will depend on the settings of the program parameters but normally rotating the knob toward the left will darken the sound and rotating it toward the right will brighten it Level Frequency Low Cutoff High frequency lt gt 1 if LPF l 1 l Knob 2 RESONANCE HPF Adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or the cutoff frequency of a high pass filter The content that is controlled will depend on the filter type specified by the program By adjusting the filter resonance level you can increase or decrease the resonance level to add a unique charac ter to the sound A cS By adjusting the cutoff frequency of a high pass filter you can modify the brightness of the sound Level Cutoff frequency lt gt Knob 3 EG INTENSITY Adjust the filter EG intensity the depth at which the filter EG is applied Rotating the knob
119. LOBAL key Global mode DISK key Disk mode COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPUNG S PLAY GLOBAL DISK COMPARE 2 Selecting pages and tabs Each mode has a large number of parameters which are grouped into pages Each page is further divided into as many as eight groups These are referred to as tabs Selecting a page Make sure that the desired mode is selected To select a mode press the appropriate mode key COMBI key DISK key Here we will use Pro gram mode as an example for our explanation Press the PROG key PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit EEEk i Bank A bia FsctSunth E 000 Noisy Stabber ms Aae ar IFX2 623 Stereo Phaser IFX3 688 No Effect IF Xd 888 No Effect Performance Editor Lt ot th 88 00 _ 98 00 00 00 Octave Pitch Osc Amp Attack Decay IFX MFX Strech Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance Press the MENU key The page jump menu will appear 12 ED In Disk mode there is only one page so the page jump menu will not appear PROGRAM Jump Fe Pa Play PI P2 P3 Edit Basic Edit Pitch Edit Filter P4 P5 Edit Amp Edit Common LFO t P8 P9 Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect Edit Master Effect In the LCD screen press the desired page You will jump to the selected page and it will appear As an example here press P1 Edit Basic e As a reminder the page in which you were when you pressed the MEN
120. MIDI files Standard MIDI files SMF make it possible for differ ent computer programs or musical instruments made by different manufacturers to exchange time based MIDI data Each standard MIDI file contains one song The TRITON supports format 0 type 0 in which all of the MIDI data is combined into one track and format 1 type 1 in which the data is separated by track When a SMF is played back in Song Play mode or loaded into a song in Disk mode the program bank that is selected will differ depending on the Global P1 System Preference tab Bank Map setting When play ing loading SMF data that conforms to the GM GS XG specifications set Bank Map to GM 2 123 Basic functions MIDI applications Song Play mode e In Song Play mode the TRITON can playback SMF data directly from a disk or external SCSI device if the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed i e the data will be played back as it is being read and does not need to be loaded into memory e Ifthe SMF data contains a GM System On message the TRITON will be initialized for GM playback p 102 in the Parameter Guide GM Initialize Sequencer mode In Disk mode when you convert a song into a Standard MIDI File and save it you can choose either format 0 or format 1 e If TRITON song data that was saved as a format 1 SMF file is loaded into another device the track configuration may be different than it was before being sa
121. Master EQ Timbre 1 Track 1 Insert Effect 1 5 LIMONO R Timbre 2 Track 2 amp a i j Timbre 8 Track 16 In Sampling mode the sound of an external source that is input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 can be pro cessed by the insert effects as the sound is sampled Settings in Sampling mode are made in Audio Input Sampling of Sampling PO Input Setup These set tings are valid only within Sampling mode Sample AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Recording Insert Effect 1 5 The external input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 can be used outside of Sampling mode In Program Combi nation Sequencer and Song Play modes the external input sound can be processed by the insert effects master effects and master EQ This means that you can use the TRITON as a 2 in 6 out effect processor When 093 Vocoder is selected the TRITON can be used as a vocoder effect processor in which its internal sounds are controlled by an external mic input Send Return Master Effect 1 2 i OUTPUT z aN Oscillator Filter Amplifier insert Effect 1 5 Master EQ LIMONO R AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Routing settings and effect set tings The insert effects master effects and master EQ have the same structure in all modes but the routing set tings will determine how the oscillators of a program or the timbres of a combination
122. N in Disk mode can also be used by a combination Combinations that you edit or create can be written into the 512 combination memory areas of banks A D In Disk mode you can save combinations on a floppy 52 disk or on other external media p 40 Playing a combination PO Play Here you can select and play combinations For each timbre 1 8 you can also select the program and set its status pan and level You can also make arpeggiator settings Selecting a combination There are three ways to select a combination For the procedure refer to the appropriate page From the TRITON s front panel Selecting and playing a combination p 23 Selecting by bank combination number Selecting by combination category Selecting with 10 s HOLD e With a connected foot switch Other functions p 125 e By receiving MIDI program change messages MIDI p 115 For the factory set combination names refer to the separate Voice Name List Program Select tab Selecting a program for each timbre 1 8 There are three ways to select a program for each tim bre 1 8 For the procedure refer to the appropriate page e From the TRITON s front panel Simple combination editing p 35 Selecting by bank program number Selecting by program category e By receiving MIDI program change messages MIDI p 115 lA It is not possible to use MIDI program changes to select a program on a Timbre whose St
123. OLS 1 4 knob B mode 26 47 57 116 118 127 Realtime quantize 64 Index Realtime recording 63 Pattern 68 Track 63 REC WRITE 39 40 Recording control data 69 Recording Controller 69 Rename 38 Resonance 27 48 RESONANCE HPF 26 Restoring the factory settings 42 Reverse 46 Ribbon controller 25 118 Amount of pitch change 47 Lock function 26 139 Routing AUDIO INPUT 109 Combination Sequencer Song Play 108 Program 107 Sampling 109 RPPR 33 72 72 Check box 33 Playback 73 Realtime recording 73 Setting 72 Shutdown Key RPPR stop 33 S Sample 77 Recording 78 Save 40 83 Sampling 75 78 106 109 Sampling frequency 76 Save 37 PCG file SNG file KSC file KMP file KSF file SMF 94 External media 40 Jukebox list 88 Scale 126 Scroll bar 10 Selecting an arpeggio pattern 30 96 Send 91 108 110 Combination Sequencer Song Play 108 Program 107 Sampling 109 Sequencer 58 Setting a parameter 13 Shortcuts 128 SIMM 17 Single 45 Single track recording 63 RPPR 74 SNG file SNG 93 94 Solo 62 86 Song 60 Converting a cue list 71 Song editing 70 Song Play 85 Sostenuto 118 Sounding a beep 127 Specifications 135 Split 54 56 Standard MIDI Files SMF 58 59 85 94 123 Status 35 Combination 53 55 Sequencer 59 Song Play 85 Step 101 Step recording 63 69 Stereo 83 140 Stereo source 80 SW1 SW2 25 47 57 118 127 Sync Arpeggiator 105 122 MIDI Tempo Sync 50 RPPR 72 Sequ
124. OLS 1 4 knobs this message will be transmitted when the knob is operated SW1 modulation CC 80 Bn 50 vv SW2 modulation CC 81 Bn 51 vv If the above CC are assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 operating the switch will transmit this mes sage with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF These can also be set as the B mode functions of the REALTIME CONTROL knobs 1 4 e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of these messages can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter GuideP3 MIDIS tab Enable SW1 Enable SW2 Foot switch CC 82 Bn 52 vv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH operating the switch will transmit this message with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF This can also be set as a B mode function of the REALTIME CONTROL knobs 1 4 e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI Filter MIDI2 tab Enable Foot Pedal Switch 118 When Foot controller CC 04 Foot switch CC 82 are operated on the TRITON the specified alternate modulation or dynamic modulation etc will be controlled When these messages are received the result will be the same as if the controller had been operated For SW1 modulation CC 80 F
125. ON If you do not need this functionality you can simply use the Apple MIDI Driver without the Korg MIDI Driver When using the Apple MIDI Driver p 132 Copy the KORG MIDI Driver from the disk included with the AG 002B into the system folder of your startup disk File Edit View Label Special Macintosh HD 3 items 77 9 MB in disk 20 1 MB available EOS KORG MIDI Driver z 1 iter 27K in disk 1 3MB a tem Fo I a p KORG MIDI Driver Music Utilities a If there is a copy of Apple MIDI Driver in your sys tem folder either delete it or move it to another folder Be careful not to delete or move the Apple MIDI Manager The KORG MIDI Driver includes the functionality of the Apple MIDI Driver From the Special menu select Restart Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver Mac intosh Start up PatchBay Time Port MIDI In Port MIDI Out Port Modem Port Connected Port y Printer Port If installation has been performed correctly the KORG MIDI Driver icon shown above will appear in the PatchBay window when PatchBay is started up The modem and printer ports will be displayed differently depending on the setup condition In PatchBay double click the KORG MIDI Driver icon The setup dialog box will appear Check the Port Enable box for the port to which the TRITON is connected and specify 1 MHz Since the TRITON does not contain a KORG PC IF do not select
126. OO Noisy Stabber Cancel OK ED If you wish to overwrite the edited settings onto the currently selected program combination with the same program combination name and pro gram combination category simply press the OK button in the dialog box If you wish to modify the program combination name press the text edit button The text edit dialog box will appear Input the program combination name Text Cursor Character Set Selects the type of character py Character Set English Symbol Character buttons Shift button Switches between uppercase and lowercase Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the Clear button cursor Delete all characters Cancel button OK button of the text If you are satisfied with the text that you input press the OK button If you wish to discard your input and exit the text edit box press the Cancel button Cursor buttons Move the cursor to left or right Space button Insert a space at the cursor location When you have input the desired name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box In Category specify the category of the program combination The category you specify here can be selected in the Category Program Select menu the Category Track Program Select menu or the Category Tim bre Program Select menu when choosin
127. P8 Rout ing tab is checked Other parameters The parameters in the Sample Setup tab are set inde pendently for the High Drumsample and the Low Drumsample The parameters in the Voice Mixer tab apply to both the High and Low Drumsamples If you wish to use the settings from another KEY you can use the Copy Key Setup page menu com mand For details on each parameter p 123 in the Parameter Guide 91 Disk mode How Disk mode is organized In Disk mode you can use floppy disks or a connected external SCSI device if the separately sold EXB SCSI is installed to save or load various types of data You can also make settings related to saving and loading func tionality For details on connecting an external SCSI device and setting the ID etc refer to the owner s manual for the separately sold EXB SCSI option ee T The pages of Disk mode Load Load the selected file or directory into internal memory Save Save data from internal memory to exter nal media such as a disk Utility Rename copy or delete a disk or file cre ate new directories and set the date and time Media Information View information for the selected media Types of media that can be used Floppy disks The TRITON can use MS DOS format 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disks The capacity of a floppy disk after formatting will be 1 44 MB 18 sectors track for a 2HD disk or 720 KB 9 sectors track for a 2DD disk F
128. PCG file contains programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns and global setting data Press the page menu button to display menu com mands and select Load Selected A dialog box will appear Load PRELOAD PCG Load PRELOAD SNG too C Load PRELOAD KSC too 5 ei AE tg iets ny yet ee EEE E i Maar Cancel OK 42 If Load PRELOAD SNG too is checked when you load the SNG file will also be loaded when the PCG file is loaded If you check Load PRELOAD KSC too is checked when you load the KSC file will also be loaded when the PCG file is loaded For details on the files that are loaded by the KSC file refer to Listening to a demo song p 18 Press the OK button Program mode About the pages in Program mode In Program mode you can select and edit programs Program mode consists of pages PO P9 In PO Play you can play programs You can also per form simple editing p 34 In P1 P9 you can edit the parameters of the program that was selected in PO For details on how to access these pages or modes refer to Basic operation of the TRITON p 12 PO Play Select a program use the Perfor mance Editor to perform simple edit ing and select and set arpeggio patterns P1 Edit Basic Set basic program parameters such as oscillator and multisample Set scale and controllers P2 Edit Pitch Settings related to
129. SONG PLAY P3 Select Directory BE KFG1 616 MID 89K 2 11 1995 00 00 00 e KFG1 626 MID 84K 92 11 1995 00 00 00 CNI D KF 1 636 MID 65K 62 11 1995 00 00 00 NI D KFG1 646 MID 115K 82 11 1995 00 00 00 aN KF 1 858 MID 63K 92 11 1995 00 00 00 P label Bgen H Up If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and a hard disk etc is connected press the drive select button to select the drive that contains the desired data Then press the Open button or Up button to move between levels and find the desired SMF When the SMF file make sure that the extension is SMF appears in the LCD screen press the EXIT key and move to PO Prog Mix Press the File Select popup button From the file list choose the filename that you wish to play back SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 638 MERA 001 01 00Q Meter 1 4 J 147 Juukedox File Select Fie gt E aneso oo Play P Tracka1 Chat GGG1 Acoustic Piano Press the START STOP key Playback will begin At this time all songs dis played in the File Select popup button will play back consecutively if Auto Start is checked Press the START STOP key once again to stop playback Starting stopping playback for each song In the PO Preference tab uncheck Chain to next file or Auto Start and press the START STOP key Playback will begin and will stop when each song ends For details on these settings ref
130. START STOP key once again If the last step is End playback will stop automati cally when it reaches that point If the last step is Continue to Step01 playback will return to the first step and continue Cue lists can be selected in the same way that songs are selected Refer to and in the previ ous page 20 Selecting and playing a program In Program mode you can select a program from banks A G and play it Here we will show how to select preset programs Select various programs and hear how they sound Selecting a program Press the PROG key the LED will light and you will enter Program mode PROG ES Make sure that P page 0 Play is selected in the LCD screen If this page is not selected press the MENU key to access the page jump menu and either select PO Play in the LCD screen or numeric key 0 to dis play PO Play MENU Category PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit Mik op Tat T ae Ee a Program Number name Popup button Octave Pitch ost Amp Attack Decay MFX Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance Press Program Number name in the LCD screen to select the program The display will be highlighted Press a PROGRAM BANK A G key to select the bank p 22 Program banks of the TRI TON For example to select bank A press the A key The LED will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank A Bank
131. TH EXT or EX2 Pan MIDI on p 49 and 103 in the Parameter Guide Post insert effect panpot CC 08 Bn 08 vv vv value where 00 is far left 64 is center and 127 is far right When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Post Insert Effect Panpot messages and the panning of the sound following the insert effect will change When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated e In Program mode and Sampling mode this message is transmitted received on the global MIDI channel In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes this message is transmitted received on the MIDI channel specified for each insert effect e When you set Pan CC 8 PO Insert Effect tab in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode or when you re select the song or return to the beginning of the measure in Sequencer mode Post Insert Effect Panpot messages will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 Insert Effect MIDI on p 76 and 110 in the Parameter Guide Effect control Effect control 1 CC 12 Bn OC vv Effect control 2 CC 13 Bn OD vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Effect Control 1 2 messages and the
132. TRITON even if the Enable Portamento SW is unchecked P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Layer split and velocity switch set tings You can make most of the settings necessary for creat ing layers splits velocity switches keyboard cross fades and velocity crossfades 56 Key Zone tab key zone settings For each timbre you can specify the range of notes for which it will sound Each area that sounds a timbre is referred to as a Key Zone By setting key zones you can create a combination in which different programs sound in different areas of the keyboard By combining key zones specified for each timbre you can create layered or split combinations The upper and lower limits for the key zone of each timbre are set by the Top Key and Bottom Key respectively For example in the following diagram timbres 1 3 are set to create a layered and split combi nation This is specified by the key zone settings Timbres 2 and 3 create a layer Timbre 1 and timbres 2 3 are split between the B3 and C4 note numbers Timbre 3 __ Strings Timbre 2 Brass Timbre 1 Piano SEA C1 B3 C4 G9 To create a combination like the one shown above first use the PO Play or P1 Edit program Mixer page to select a program for each timbre 1 3 Select a piano program for timbre 1 Select a brass program for timbre 2 Select a strings program for timbre 3 In P2 Edit Trk Param
133. Thank you for purchasing the Korg TRITON proX TRITON pro or TRITON music worksta tion sampler To ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully and use the instrument as directed About this manual The owner s manuals and how to use them The TRITON proX TRITON pro and TRITON come with the following owner s manuals e Basic Guide e Parameter Guide e Voice Name List Basic Guide First read this manual carefully to gain a basic under standing of the instrument and to learn basic opera tion Introduction explains the function of each part how to make connections basic operation and gives an overview of each mode Quick Start explains basic topics hearing the demo songs selecting sounds convenient functions for per formance If you wish to begin playing immediately read this section first Basic Functions contains mode by mode explana tions of what you need to know to edit sounds record on the sequencer and record samples This section also explains how to use the arpeggiator effects and MIDI Appendices explains how to install the Korg MIDI Driver that you will need when connecting the instru ment to the TO HOST connector or to a computer and lists the specifications etc Parameter Guide The Parameter Guide contains explanations and other information regarding the operations of the parame ters and settings on the TRITON proX TRITON pro and TRITON Th
134. The input levels to the master effects are set by the Send 1 2 levels step or If Send 1 2 are zero the master effects will not apply Send 1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send 2 corresponds to MFX2 In Program P9 Edit Master Effect select the Mas ter FX tab PROGRAM P9 Edit Master Effect Master FX ai MFxX1 D 916 stereo Chorus y D 252 Reverb Hall In MFX1 and MFX2 select the type of each master effect 16 The procedure is the same as when selecting an insertion effect he The master effects cannot use double size effects amp The master effects are mono in stereo out Even if a stereo input effect is selected it will function as mono input E Each time you press the ON OFF button the mas ter effect will be switched on off When OFF the output of the master effect will be muted Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output levels of the master effects he For each effect the Wet value of the Wet Dry parameter is the output level at the effect The return value is multiplied with this Return 127 will be x1 0 to determine the actual output level of the master effect Select the MFX1 and MFX2 tabs and set the parameters for each selected effect For details on the parameters of each effect refer to p 155 in the Parameter Guide Master EQ Use the stereo 3 band master EQ to make final equalizing adjustments im
135. U key will have its top right corner bent over e You can also jump to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 P0 P9 correspond to numeric keys 0 9 e By holding down the MENU key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can jump directly to the corresponding page without displaying the page jump menu PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Program Basic EEk Oscillator Mode oice Assign Mode O Single Poly Q Single Trigger Double O Mono Q Legato O Drums Priority gt Last moa mon Scale LEE Ee Tupe P Equal Temperament i eu b c Random 1 nofe When you press the EXIT key you will return to PO from any page Selecting a tab Press one of the tabs located at the bottom of the page As an example here press the OSC Basic tab which is the second from the left e Some pages have no tabs PROGRAM P1 Edit Basi fz OSC 1 Multisample EEE O Rev Lvl 127 Octave 1 16 Transpose 00 P RoM _ S 0ffset _ Rev Lvi 127 Tune 0008 P 990 A Piano Delay 0ams Rev Lvl 127 Octave 1 4 Transpose 12 251 Noise Low P Rom _ S offset Rev Lvi 127 Tune 1200 D 899 A Piano Delay papam elocity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi 05C1 001_ 05C2 001_ To move to another page or tab press the MENU key and repeat the procedure from step 3 Setting a parameter The parameter value in the edit cell can be set by
136. a floppy disk or an external SCSI device such as a hard disk when the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and play along with the playback if desired Make effect settings for use in Song Play mode The arpeggiator can be used while you play along with the SMF playback SMF songs can be played back in succession You can use the jukebox function to playback songs in any specified order Sampling mode Sample sounds from an external audio device or mic connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT jacks Insert effects can be applied to the external input sound while you sample Edit the waveform data you sampled or waveform data that you loaded in Disk mode and set loop points etc Edit multisamples consisting of two or more samples A multisample can be converted into a program so that a multisample created in Sampling mode can be used in Program Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes Global mode Make settings that affect the entire TRITON such as master tune and global MIDI channel Create drum kits 64 kits arpeggio user patterns 232 patterns and user scales 16 one octave scales and 1 all note scale Create drum kits using the 413 internal drumsamples ROM You can also use drumsamples from an optional EXB PCM series board if installed or samples RAM that you created in Sampling mode Adjust the input level etc from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 These settings are valid in modes other than Samplin
137. a different cat egory you can set in the dialog box when writing the program p 39 Category names can be changed in Category Name Global P4 When you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when you opened the popup menu Other ways to select a program Using a connected switch to select programs An separately sold on off type foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 can be connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and used to select programs Selecting programs from a MIDI device p 114 MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by the TRI TON to select programs 22 Program banks of the TRITON The TRITON contains program banks A G Banks A E each contain 128 programs numbered 000 127 for a total of 640 programs With the factory settings banks contain a variety of preset programs that use the internal PCM ROM multisamples effects and arpeggiator patterns etc With the factory settings bank E does not contain programs It can be used as a user bank for you to write programs you yourself create such as pro grams that use multisamples you sampled in Sam pling mode Bank F can be used if the EXB MOSS option sold separately is installed It can contain 128 programs number
138. a value of 1536 mm vv 0C 00 is 12 one octave Although it is possible to set a negative value for a timbre track only positive values can be set using RPN messages Controlling the arpeggiator NPRN Arpeggiator operations can be controlled using NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number messages NRPN messages can be freely used in non compatible ways by different manufacturers and models of instrument The procedure for using NRPN messages is the same as for RPN but you will use NRPN MSB CC 99 Bn 63 mm and NRPN LSB CC 98 Bn 62 rr messages n channel mm rr upper and lower bytes of the parameter number to specify the parameter NRPN arpeggiator on off Bn 63 00 Bn 62 02 Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF switch When the switch is turned ON the data will be mm 127 7F and when turned OFF the data will be mm 0 00 and the arpeg giator will be turned on off accordingly This can also be specified as a function of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH Similarly the arpeggiator will be turned on off when this message is received ON when mm is 64 40 or greater and OFF when 63 3F or less NRPN arpeggiator gate control Bn 63 00 Bn 62 OA Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you operate the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob and the arpeggiator gate will change When this message is received the result will be the same NRPN arpeggiator velocity c
139. ack refer to p 71 in the Parameter Guide The assigned keys will be shown as a keyboard graphic in the LCD screen E Unassigned keys can be used for normal keyboard performance Use Track Select to select the track that will be played from the keyboard For exam ple you might assign backing patterns such as drums and bass to the C 2 B2 keys and use these keys to control pattern playback and use keys C3 and above to play solos in realtime It is a good idea to keep the assigned keys together in this way Song bene eked pet manna jit Preset Patterns er Tei Ep rak gree AFFE el cc Fjar font Fhe mason Kika tig pe imeemare aan eth ree Lee E JBE PRE Yh P6 Pattern RPPR page RPPR Setup tab Z RPPR gt RPPR function is on J RPPR Normal song playback and recording af 00 R amp B Shuffle 1 User Pattern U00 U99 72 RPPR playback Here s how you can use the RPPR function to perform in the P0 Play REC page You can also playback a song while you perform with the RPPR function In Sequencer mode select P0 Play REC Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on The on off setting is memorized for each song Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings EJ Keys to which no patte
140. ack of a song Controller settings If the separately sold EXB MOSS expansion is installed settings for related parame ters The structure of Sequencer mode Sequencer mode consists of the following pages Songs A song consists of tracks 1 16 a master track song parameters such as the song name effect arpeggiator and RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns A maximum of 200 such songs can be created on the TRITON Tracks 1 16 and the master track each consist of setup parameters located at the start location and musical data within the track Setup parameters Musical data P5 Track Edit Edit musical data for song tracks Specify track names P6 Pattern RPPR_ Record and edit patterns for a song Spec ify pattern names RPPR function settings for a song P7 Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings P8 Insert Effect Select and make settings for insert effects Set the routing insert effects master effects and individual output send amounts for each track of the song P9 Master Effect Select and make settings for the master effects Master EQ settings amp If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed bank F programs can also be used in Sequencer mode For details on the parameters of bank F programs refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual 60 Tracks 1 16 Bank Program No PLAY MUTE REC Tracks 1 16 Note On Off Program Change including Bank Select Pan Pitch
141. all Bell Mall Bell Mall BellMall Keyboar 064 coed coed J Hold Balance Oz 36 Press timbre 2 Pan it will be highlighted Use the numeric keys 0 9 ENTER key VALUE slider VALUE dial or A V keys to modify the value With a setting of C064 the sound will be located in the center A setting of L000 places the sound at the far left and R127 at the far right With a setting of RND the sound will move randomly between left and right each time a note is played Adjusting the volume Press timbre 2 Volume it will be highlighted Use the numeric keys 0 9 ENTER key VALUE slider VALUE dial or A V keys to modify the value If you check Hold Balance and adjust the Vol ume value the volume balance between the tim bres at the time that Hold Balance was checked will be maintained while the volume of all timbres is adjusted Saving data Types of data that can be saved On the TRITON there are three ways to save data writing to internal memory saving on external media floppy disk etc and MIDI data dump Writing to internal memory The following data that you edit can be written into internal memory e Program settings Programs 0 127 in banks A F However bank F is available only if the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed e Combination settings Combinations 0 127 in banks A D Global settings Page 0 4 Us
142. am a Korg TRITON series instrument with system version GM system on FO 7E nn 09 01 F7 When this message is received in Song Play mode the TRITON will be initialized for GM playback Master volume FO 7F nn 04 01 vv mm F7 vv lower byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together indicating 16384 steps This message is transmitted if you assign Master Vol ume as the function of the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as a B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knob and operate the controller This will adjust the overall volume balance without changing the relative volume balance between timbres tracks When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Master balance FO 7F nn 04 02 vv mm F7 vv lower byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together indicating 16384 steps where 8192 is the default position and lower values will move the sound toward the left When this is received the overall panning will be adjusted without changing the relative panning between timbres tracks Master fine tuning FO 7F nn 04 03 vv mm F7 A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 4096 mm vv 20 00 is 50 cents and 12288 mm vv 60 00 is 50 cents When this is received the Global PO Basic tab Master Tune parameter will be set Master coarse tuning FO 7F nn 04 04 vv mm F7 Normally only the upper byte mm is used A value
143. ample zz Drom s ortset Rev Level D 8991 BD Dry 2 Cutoff 00 Resonance G Attack 00 Decay 00 Sample Voice In Drum kit Select select the drum kit that you wish to edit If necessary use the Copy Drum Kit page menu command to copy settings from a preset drum kit or a GM drum kit M GM drum kits 64 72 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 64 72 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 00 63 and then edit the copy Press KEY Select the note number that you wish to edit You can select a note number by the VALUE con trollers and also holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard The parameter settings for the drumsample of the selected note number will appear Refer to the explanations below for the Sample Setup tab and Voice Mixer tab and make the desired settings The parameters are located in the Sample Setup tab and the Voice Mixer tab As necessary repeat steps 4 to set the parame ters for each key To change the drum kit name use the Rename Drum Kit page menu command p 38 If you wish to save the edited drum kit into inter nal memoty be sure to Write the drum kit If you turn off the power without writing your edits will be lost p 39 Sample Setup tab Assig
144. ams using the sampling function used by the demonstration songs E When you load PRELOAD PGG it will be written into internal memory This data is preserved even if the power is turned off amp When you load PRELOAD PGG the data that had been written before loading this data will be rewritten If you wish to keep this data you must first save it on a floppy disk before loading PRE LOAD PCG p 40 PRELOAD SNG e Demonstration song and demonstration cue list data EN When you load PRELOAD SNG it will be written into internal sequencer memory This memory is volatile and the data will be lost when the power is turned off amp When you load PRELOAD SNG the data that had been written before loading this data will be rewritten If you wish to keep this data you must first save it on a floppy disk before loading PRE LOAD SNG p 40 PRELOAD KSC e Sample program data used by the demonstration songs ED When you load PRELOAD KSC its multisample sample data will be written into the TRITON s multisample sample memory This memory is volatile and the data will be lost when the power is turned off amp Whether or not previously written data will be erased when you load PRELOAD KSC is deter mined by the Select KSC Allocation setting Refer to step of the following procedure 18 1 Loading the demo song data in Disk mode Insert the included TNFD 00P floppy disk into the disk drive For detail
145. an external tone generator connected via MIDI MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from the TRITON s key board must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will sound any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel amp On some preset combinations that use the arpeg giator timbres assigned to the arpeggiator may not have a Status of INT and MIDI Channel of Gch The reason for this is that these settings are for tim bres that sound only when the arpeggiator is on This is a very useful technique for creating combi nations that use the arpeggiator Refer to Dual arpeggiator editing p 104 and to 7 1b p 39 in the Parameter Guide and study the rela tionship between arpeggiator assignments Sta tus and MIDI Channel Bank Select when Status EX2 This setting is valid when Status is set to EX2 It specifies the Bank Select message that will be transmit ted from the TRITON E a strings Strings strings rotrings boari Drums Force OSC Mode Normally you will set this to PRG If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically set this either to MN Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if
146. and reverse playback Start loop start and end addresses can be specified in units of a single sample Loop tune reverse playback and loop lock functions are also supported The Use Zero function automatically detects zero cross points making it easy to find the beginning or end of the sample or click free locations The grid function displays a BPM based grid on the waveform display helping you to create loops or make waveform edits that match the desired BPM Each multisample allows you to create up to 128 indices Each index consists of a sample assignment a key zone an original key a playback pitch and settings such as level The Keyboard amp Index display lets you edit a multisample while viewing the assignments and zones of each sample The playback pitch of each index can be matched to a desired BPM value by using the BPM Adjust function playback pitch adjust to set the loop frequency Sample names and multisample names of up to 16 characters can be assigned Sample names and multisample names can also be viewed in Disk mode p 132 Translation in the Parameter Guide 75 Basic functions Sampling mode Pages in Sampling mode For the procedure of entering each page or modes refer to Basic operation of the TRITON p 12 PO Recording Record samples Select the sample or multisample to record make various recording settings and AUDIO INPUT settings View the memory status
147. arately sold EXB SCSI option is installed this data can also be saved on high capacity media such as a hard disk etc For details on the file format when saving p 139 in the Parameter Guide e Programs combinations global settings drum kits and user arpeggio patterns from internal memory e Songs cue lists and patterns e Multisamples and sample data created in Sampling mode e Standard MIDI Files SMF Sequencer mode songs can be saved as SMF data e System exclusive data System exclusive data received by the TRITON from an external MIDI device The TRITON can function as a data filer e Jukebox lists Jukebox lists are saved in Song Play mode p 88 Other data is saved in Disk mode MIDI data dump The following types of data can be transmitted as a MIDI data dump and saved on an external data filer or other device e Internal memory programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns and global settings e Songs cue lists patterns Writing to internal memory Memory protect To prevent programs combinations songs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns from being overwritten accidentally the TRITON provides a Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from floppy disk or other external media use the following proce dure to turn off memory protect uncheck the appro priate check box Memory protect must also be turned off before the above
148. ator A will operate only for notes B3 and lower e Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T7 but this is so that the T8 program B068 Drum n Bass Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for T7 and T8 Status MIDI Channel Arpeggiator Assign Off Gch A INT 02 A e When the arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound timbres that are set to Gch or the global MIDI channel in this example 01 T8 will not sound since its MIDI Channel of 02 T7 will not sound since its Status is Off even if T7 is set Gch e The arpeggiator will be operated by any MIDI channel assigned to a timbre In this example these are MIDI channels 02 and Gch global MIDI 99 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will cause arpeggiator A which is assigned to T7 Gch to run T8 will be sounded by arpeggiator A T7 will not sound since its Status is Off e In this example the Status of T7 is Off so it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that is used to make T8 sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination B86 lt Moon Jam gt Select and play combination B86 lt Moon Jam gt Before you play make sure that the global MIDI chan nel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T3 and arpeggiator B is assign
149. atus is other than INT amp If a program currently being edited in Program mode is used in a combination the combination will use the sound that is being edited For the factory set program names refer to the sepa rate Voice Name List Status For each timbre 1 8 this indicates the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator Normally you will set this to INT if you want the TRITON s internal tone generator to sound Turn this Off for unused timbres With settings of Off EXT or EX2 that timbre will not sound Settings of EXT and EX2 allow the timbre to control an external tone generator connected via MIDI p 35 p 30 in the Parameter Guide Mixer tab Here you can adjust the pan and level of each timbre 1 8 p 35 p 31 in the Parameter Guide Arpeggio Play A Arpeggio Play B tab e Arpeggiators A and B can be switched on off independently To turn both arpeggiators on off use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key amp The arpeggiators will function only for timbres 1 8 to which arpeggiator A or B is assigned e Arpeggiator parameters including the arpeggio pattern selection can be edited in realtime while you play e ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE and VELOCITY knobs will control the tempo note length and strength of the arpeggio notes For details refer to Using the arpeggiator while you play p 31 How a combination is structured A combination consists of a variety of parameters that can b
150. ay Arpeggiator A Arpeggiator B For each arpeggiator A and B you can make settings for Pattern Select Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard p 96 Other settings for the arpeggiator You can also set Gate Velocity Swing and Scan Zone These parameters are set in Combination P7 Arpeggiator p 99 Linking the arpeggiator to combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings writ ten in a combination will also be selected when you switch combinations or whether the arpeggiator status will not change when you switch combinations With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the combination sound This setting is made in Auto Arpeggiator Global PO Basic tab Creating an user arpeggio pattern Arpeggio patterns that you create can be written to U000 231 These can be created in Global P6 User Arpeggio p 100 Checking the structure of a user arpeggio pattern Combination B063 Echo Jamm COMBINATION P Play CEMER Y iO Sort Oo Key Sync i Mut V Latch Oo Keyboard l COMBINATION P8 aE Arpeggio Play B EEk Bank B A id Rnuthmic Pattern E 131 DIE Echo Jamm Arpeggiator Run Ma we p Arpesgiator B Pat P vo96ta7B Stab Rith octave O2 j sort Ek
151. ays the TRITON s tone generator Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI connectors of the TRITON to the MIDI connectors of your external MIDI device p 111 16 6 Connections to a computer An IBM PC compatible or Apple Macintosh com puter can be connected to the TRITON so that the TRI TON s keyboard controllers and sequencer can transmit data to the computer and so that the com puter can play the TRITON s tone generator Connect the TRITON s TO HOST connector to the appropriate port of your computer p 112 7 Connections to a SCSI device If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed you can connect the TRITON to a SCSI compatible device hard disk drive CD ROM drive etc For the EXB SCSI installation refer to p 237 in the Parameter Guide l Il N uf o D Turning the power on off amp Before you turn on the power make sure that the desired connections have been made as described in Connections p 15 1 Turning the power on Press the TRITON s POWER switch to turn on the power The LCD screen will display the name of your model TRITON TRITON pro or TRITON prox and the software version The following graphic shows the factory set LCD screen of the TRITON The version number is sub ject to change without notice TRITON MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER SIMM Slot1 16MB KORG TRITON Version 1 8 8 Turn on your powered monitors
152. b Key Transpose The pitch can be transposed over a range of 1 octave Here we will explain how to adjust the tuning and transposition of the entire TRITON Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P0 Basic Setup Select the Basic tab To adjust the tuning select Master Tune to adjust the transposition select Key Transpose Use the VALUE controllers to adjust the setting You can use numeric keys 0 9 to enter a value and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can use the VALUE dial the VALUE slider or the A V keys E If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 39 Bypassing the effects Normally effects are turned on off within each pro gram combination or song or in Sampling mode or Song Play mode However if you want the entire TRI TON not to use its insert effects or master effects you can bypass these effects Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P0 Basic Setup Select the Basic tab To turn off insert effects 1 5 check the IFX1 5 Off check box To turn off master effect 1 check the MFX1 Off check box To turn off master effect 2 check the MEX2 Off check box E If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 39 Specifying
153. be sounded according to the notes you play on the key board GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup al f D gt 1 Sort Key Syne Resolution P U Lateh Keyboard Arpeggio Pattern Set Arpeggio Tone Mode _ Normal Fixed Note Arpeggio Type D gt As Played Octave Motion Dd Up Fined Wot Mod p Trioger Ait Tena EEO ener Select the Pattern Edit tab GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Aa Fixed Note No C2 Velocity 964 Flam 00 Pattern Pattern _Setup_I _Edit Pitch Offset 00 Gate Each Tone in the display will be shown as a small circle Now you will can set Tone No and Fixed Note No Select Tone No and set Fixed Note No to the note number that will be sounded by that tone For each horizontal line Tone in the display you will specify the drumsample note number of the drum kit Here set Tone No and Fixed Note No as fol lows Tone00 C2 kick Tone01 F2 snare Tone02 F 3 closed hi hat Tone03 G 3 open hi hat The drumsamples that correspond to each note number will differ depending on the drum kit You will find it convenient to audition the drum sounds from the keyboard and then input the Fixed Note No by holding down the ENTER key and play ing the desired note Creating a drum pattern Input the kick Tone00 Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Then set Step No to 0
154. ber or velocity value c Popup button 1 gt When this button is pressed a popup menu will appear showing the parameter values that are available for selection To input the parameter value press the desired value in the popup menu 10 When a popup menu is displayed operating a VALUE controller p 13 will close the popup menu If the popup menu is unlocked see below Pin it will close if you touch a location outside the popup menu Popup menu Pin UGG3 A B UGB5 A B UGG6 A B Guitar Strum 7 UGG 7 A B Simple Strum UG88 A B Guitar Picking UG18 A B CountryStrum2 G Scroll bar Pin This switches the popup menu display between locked and unlocked When locked the pin will be shown closed and the popup menu will remain displayed even after you press a parameter value When unlocked the pin will be shown opened and the popup menu will close immediately when you press a parame ter value Scroll bar Use this when you wish to see parameter values that cannot be displayed in the screen at once Press here to scroll to left or right Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location Popup button 2 b When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the fol lowing selections Press here to scroll to the corresponding location e Bank Program Select Bank Combination Select Select program
155. between softly played and strongly played notes LFO 1 2 Specify how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume the tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s for which you set an LFO Intensity value AMS Intensity adjusts the depth by which the trem olo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you operate an AMS alternate modulation source For example if AMS is set to JS Y moving the joy stick toward yourself will apply tremolo Amp EG tab Here you can make settings for the amplifier EG that produces changes in volume over time Every instrument has its own characteristic curve of volume change This is part of what gives each instru ment its identifiable character Conversely by applying a strings type Amp EG curve to an organ type multi 50 sample you can produce a sound with a character unlike a typical organ Piano Organ Strings P5 Edit Common LFO LFO settings For each oscillator you can use two LFO Low Fre quency Oscillator units LFO1 and LFO2 You are free to select the type of each LFO and set its speed The depth of the LFO1 and LFO2 whose settings you make here can be adjusted in pages P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Filter and P4 Edit Amp PROGRAM P5 Edit Common LFO OSC1 LFO1 aa p OSC 1 LFO1 waveform D D N Frequency 67_ Offset 00 Key Sync Fade ao Delay GG pms Frequency Modulation
156. board and play notes on the keyboard to play back or record patterns in realtime Cue List A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in succession The TRITON allows you to create 20 cue lists Each cue list allows you to connect a maximum of 99 songs in any order and to specify the number of times that each song will repeat Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step contains a song number and the number of repeats For example a song consisting of an introduction mel ody A melody B bridge solo backing and ending could be created using a separate song for each unit Then you could use a cue list to play the introduction twice melody A four times melody B four times the break twice melody A four times etc to create the completed song When you will need to change the structure of the song the cue list function provides an efficient way to do so The page menu command Convert to Song lets you convert the two or more songs in a cue list into a single song This allows you to use a cue list to create the backing then convert the cue list into a song and add solo phrases on unused tracks Track 1 Setup parameters Musical data gt Track 2 Setup parameters Musical data H Track 3 Setup parameters Musical data gt Routing P8 1 Pattern U00 U99 RPPR Setup Controller Setup P4 4 P6
157. bon controller For the procedure refer to SW1 SW2 E You can use the ribbon controller as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modula tion to control program parameters or effect parameters SW1 SW2 swi sw2 You can use these keys as sources for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters These switches can also be used to switch the octave to turn portamento on off or to lock the position of the ribbon controller or after touch function You can specify the way in which the SW1 and SW2 keys will operate either Toggle when the assigned function will be switched on off each time the key is pressed or Momentary when the assigned function will be switched on only as long as you hold down the key hotel In Program mode the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be checked in the PO Play tab Per formance p 27 nofe When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is saved hotel For details on making these settings refer to Set ting the functions of SW1 and SW2 p 127 The Lock function Joystick When the SW1 or SW2 key function is set toJS X Lock JS Y Lock or JS Y Lock the sound produced by moving the joystick can be held even after the joy stick is returned to the center position When the SW1 key is set to JS Y Lock and is operat ing as a Toggle switch
158. ceived by the TRITON the data will be written into the edit buffer so if you wish to save it to inter nal memory you will need to perform the Write operation The Write operation can also be per formed by a MIDI exclusive Program Write Request or Combination Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using the TRITON s switches p 37 Saving data e Ifthe Global P1 MIDI Enable Exclusive setting is checked data will also be dumped in response to a Dump Request message This data is transmitted and received on the global MIDI channel Editing sounds etc By using various MIDI exclusive data dumps you can rewrite all programs or an individual program By using parameter change messages you can edit indi vidual parameters as follows Parameter changes In Program mode all parameters other than the program name can be edited Performance editor parameters are included In Combination mode parameters other than the combination name can be edited Drum kit parameter change User arpeggio pat tern parameter change e In Global mode you can edit drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Since the other global parameters or Sequencer mode data cannot be edited you will use data dumps to transfer this data Data dumping of Sampling mode data is not supported The global MIDI channel is used to transmit and receive this data First check Global P1 MIDI Enable Exclusive so that exclus
159. ch sce ccna iad ste ie aaa 115 Pitch bender lt io rare pe h e sha ate Bee dee 115 Control change sessi inerea eee eee eee 115 Using RPN to edit 0 000 119 Controlling the arpeggiator NPRN 120 About system exclusive messages 120 If notes are stuck 0 0 cece ee 121 Playing the TRITON multi timbrally from an external device 00 cece ee eee 122 Synchronizing the playback of the arpeggiator OF sequencer rosink eee eee eee 122 Recording musical data from an external device dep ea a Lada see ae a 122 About GM GS XG oe eee 123 About standard MIDI files 123 Other functions 000e0eee0 00125 Tuning to another instrument Transposing 125 Bypassing the effects 000 eee 125 Specifying the function of the ASSIGNABLE Switch and ASSIGNABLE Pedal 125 Adjusting the way in which velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone 126 Creating original scales 000005 126 Changing the scale n nanana nananana 126 Setting the function of SW1 and SW2 127 Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 ooann 127 Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD SCHOO 50 45 deaa a AE a o a eS ES 127 Sounding a beep when the LCD screen is press d ojos ig heh a ian 127 Using the TRITON as a data filer 127 Shortcuts cin essai ied net ara acd CA ees 128 Appendice
160. ch indi vidual program combination or song In Sampling mode and Song Play mode the B mode functions are set for the entire mode For details on making these settings p 127 Viewing the parameters that are assigned to SW1 SW2 and the realtime control B mode In Program mode the P0 Play shows the functions that are assigned to SW1 and SW2 and to the B mode of realtime control knobs 1 2 3 and 4 PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit Biik i Functions Bank A d E000 Noisy Stabber W 1H14 3 2 023 Stereo Phaser Knob2B Decay Functions i i 3 8B0 No Effect Knob3B KMod3 assigned to 4 GB0 No Effect KnobdB KModd SW1 and j SW2 keys Performance Editor l l l ll l l 00 00 a8 00 08 00 Octave Pitel ose Amp Attack Dec IFX MFX h ay Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance VALUE slider When a program number is selected in Program wwe PO Play or when a combination number is selected in Combination mode page P0 Play you can use the VALUE slider as a source for J alternate modulation or effect dynamic modula f tion and control program parameters or effect parameters Keyboard Velocity The force with which you play a note can apply an effect Normally this is used to control volume or the speed or sensitivity of the EG After Touch An effect can be applied by pressing down on the key board after playing a note No
161. combination names refer to the separate Voice Name List Using controllers to modify the sound The TRITON provides a variety of controllers that can be used to control the tone pitch volume effects and arpeggiator etc in realtime while you play Joystick Ne Die Vag ail co a a N JS X Move the joystick toward the right to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend up JS X Move the joystick toward the left to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend down JS Y Move the joystick away from yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the oscillator LFO vibrato JSC Y Move the joystick toward yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control filter LFO wah E3 You can use the Lock function of SW 1 or 2 to hold the effect even after the joystick is returned to the center position For the procedure refer to SW1 SW2 E You can use the joystick as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to con trol program parameters or effect parameters Ribbon controller X 4m X Move your finger to the left and right on the ribbon controller to apply an effect Normally this is used to control pitch volume or filter etc ES You can use the Lock function of SW 1 or 2 to hold the effect even after you release your finger from the rib
162. ctave is set to1 and Sort is checked P004 RANDOM is one possibility 96 POOO UP UP 6 Zar oe e P001 DOWN DOWN ES ct P002 ALT1 ATI ZIT oe Ki oe oe o l th P003 ALT2 ALT2 6 AES aS Z e ba e o e P004 RANDOM a ee RANDOM 6 oe o e U000 A B U199 A B With the factory settings various arpeggio patterns are preset These include a variety of patterns such as drum or bass phrases or guitar or keyboard backing riffs Arpeggio pattern names are listed in the separate Voice Name List U200 U215 C U216 U231 D With the factory settings these do not contain pat terns If certain separately sold EXB PCM series option boards are installed and the included disk is loaded other arpeggio patterns will be added to U200 U215 C U216 U231 D Make settings for the various parameters Octave Select the octave range in which the arpeggio will be played Octave 4 oe UP aT sl uM amp h If a user arpeggio pattern is selected the Octave Motion setting Global P6 Pattern Setup tab will affect the way in which the arpeggio is played Resolution Specify the spacing o
163. cted For details on alternate modulation and AMS refer to p 209 in the Parameter Guide Suggestions on using alternate modulation When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modulation will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Then select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example if you want to control a guitar like sound so that it appears to be approaching feedback when the joystick is moved away you will make settings so that the joystick controls filter modulation or the resonance level 51 Basic functions Program mode Combination mode Pages in Combination mode In Combination mode you select combinations and edit them Combination mode consists of pages PO P9 To play a combination select PO Play In P1 P9 you can edit the parameters of the combination that was selected in PO For details on accessing each page or modes ep 12 Basic operation of the TRITON Select a combination select a program for each timbre set the status pan and level select and set the arpeggio pat tern P1 Edit program Select a program for each timbre and Mixer set pan and level These are common to the parameters in PO and can be edited from either page
164. cted in Track Select and the arpeggiator is running the performance of the arpeggiator will be recorded in the pattern For details on arpeggiator settings p 98 p 105 p 73 in the Parameter Guide E If you want the arpeggio to start at the moment that recording begins turn off ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF hold down a chord on the keyboard and then start recording The arpeggiator will start at the moment that recording begins and the arpeggio will be recorded When you record to the end of the pattern you will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording The musical data that is recorded will be added to the previously recorded data During pattern recording you can erase unwanted musical data by pressing the REC WRITE key or by checking the Remove Data check box For details refer to Loop All Tracks step p 66 Press the START STOP key Pattern recording will end To use a user pattern that was recorded in this way or a preset pattern you can execute Put to Track to assign the pattern to a track e p 70 in the Parame ter Guide A pattern can also be used in the RPPR Setup tab p 73 p 71 in the Parameter Guide EEI H THE TEE LLE oo In the LCD screen USED IN SONG TRACK indi cates how that pattern is assigned to the tracks USED IN RPPR indicates how that pattern is used in RPPR Setup i e the keys and tracks to which the pattern is a
165. cy will rise as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound darker e Intensity to A and Intensity to B adjust the effect that keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B p 13 in the Parameter Guide Filter EG Adjust the effect produced by the filter EG whose set tings are made in the Filter 1 EG tab e Velocity to A and Velocity to B adjust the effect that velocity will have on the filter EG depth e Intensity to A and Intensity to B adjust the depth of the filter EG e AMS Int to A and AMS Int to B adjust the effect that AMS will have on the filter EG depth These three settings will determine the depth of the tonal change produced by the filter EG Filter A B Modulation Set this when you wish to produce tonal change by using controllers etc to vary the cutoff frequency Filter 1 LFO Mod tab Make settings that allow the LFO to produce cyclic changes in tone a wah effect LFO Intensity to A and LFO Intensity to B will cause the tone to be modulated JS Y Intensity to A and JS Y Intensity to B speci fies the depth of the wah effect that is produced when you move the joystick toward yourself AMS Intensity to A and AMS Intensity to B speci fies the depth of the wah effect that is produce
166. d performance on keys that are not assigned to the RPPR function will be recorded on the track specified by Track Select In the P0 Play REC tab Preference set Recording Setup to Over Write Multitrack recording can be used in Over Write Over Dub Manual Punch In and Auto Punch In recording modes Here we will describe the proce dure for the most commonly used overwrite recording Check the Multi REC check box Hemer ieg Soleo i ir write hain Pach ie Cea h Hemal Pumch i Press the Program T01 08 or Program T09 16 tab The PLAY MUTE REC button of each track will indicate REC For the tracks that you do not wish to record press the PLAY MUTE REC button to select either PLAY or MUTE You will record all tracks played by RPPR and the keyboard performance track selected by Track Select 73 Basic functions Sequencer mode For example if you are using tracks 1 and 2 for RPPR playback and using track 3 for keyboard per formance you would set REC only for tracks 1 2 and 3 as shown below TTT alee eed 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 120 P Manu S000 SONG Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be on In Location specify the point at which recording will begin It will not be possible to change the location if you are recording the song for the first time so proceed to step Press the
167. d starting measure locations on both devices Even if MIDI Clock is set to External MIDI or External PCI F and the TRITON is being controlled from an external device musical data will be trans mitted by tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 Recording musical data from an exter nal device There are two ways in which you can play back an external sequencer and record its playback on the TRI TON e Set Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock to Internal begin recording and then start the external sequencer With this method the MIDI messages will be recorded without the two devices being synchronized Since the incoming musical data will simply be recorded this method allows the performance to be reproduced faithfully but since measure divisions etc will not be kept track of this method is not suitable if you intend to edit the data later e If you set Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock to External MIDI or External PCI F the start of recording and the tempo etc will all be under the control of the external sequencer Since the two devices will be synchronized during the recording process measure divisions etc will be accurately preserved You will need to set the time signature before recording However tempo changes during the performance will not be recorded so you will have to insert any tempo changes later For normal multi track recording you will use this method p 66 Multi multitrack recording
168. d user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A 104 If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode and in PO Play select the Arpeggio Play tab and uncheck the Arpeggiator Run check box To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the page menu command Rename Arpeggio Pat tern p 38 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pat tern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost p 39 If you wish to save the state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination p 38 ES You can edit a user arpeggio pattern in Sequencer and Song Play modes in the same way as in Com bination mode However when you play the keyboard in Global mode the program and arpeggiator of tracks that match the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI will be heard For example suppose that you assign track 1 to MIDI channel 01 and arpeggiator A and assign track 2 to MIDI channel 02 and arpeggiator B MIDI channel is set in Sequencer mode P2 Trk Param by MIDI Ch1 8 9 16 and is fixed in Song P
169. d when you operate an AMS alternate modulation source For example if you set AMS to After Touch a wah effect will be produced when you apply pressure to the keyboard Filter 1 EG tab Make settings for the filter EG which controls time variant changes in tone Make settings for the EG here and set the depth of its effect in the Filter 1 Mod tab Filter EG parameter p 15 in the Parameter Guide Filter EG and Amplifier EG When the Filter EG changes the cutoff frequency the tone will change However depending on the volume changes produced by the Amplifier EG this can be heard in different ways For example by changing the speed at which the tone and volume begin attack or decay you can significantly vary the character of the tonal change It is a good idea to adjust the changes of both the Filter EG tone and the Amplifier EG vol ume as you proceed with editing Amp 1 EG tab PA Edit Amp Amplifier settings These settings affect the volume Here you can adjust the way in which the Amp EG and LFO produce time varying and cyclic changes in volume and how the controllers etc will affect the volume Amp 1 applies to OSC1 and Amp2 applies to OSC2 If the OSC Mode is Single or Drums only Amp1 will be available For example the volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note remains constant as l
170. d when you play PG p 59 Notes do not stop e In Program P1 Edit Basic select the Program Basic tab make sure that the Hold check box is UNChECKE narr mira a aaant PGrp 4 e In Global P2 Controller make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly E atasagneasiceava deducted tare diesel PG p 121 Cannot input sound e Is your audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks ccccccisscsstscscarareccarcseecsta csv p 78 e Is the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob raised e If there is no sound in Sampling mode go to Sampling P0 Recording select the Input Setup tab and make sure that Level and BUS IFX Select are set correctly sss ssesssssssisssssssteseeeeni p 79 e If there is no sound in Program Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes go to Global PO Basic Setup select the Audio Input tab and make sure that Level and BUS IFX Select are set COPEC Y reiia eei eri p 109 Noise or oscillation is heard e When using an effect on the external audio source being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 oscillation may occur depending on the type of effect or on the parameter settings Please adjust the input level output level and effect parameters You need to be particularly careful when using a high gain effect e After a sample edit has been executed or after a stereo sample has been recorded a small noise may be heard This has no effect on the audio
171. de the corresponding program parameters will be temporarily edited by these messages You can Write the program to save the modified state except for certain parameters The Write operation can also be performed by a MIDI exclusive Program Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using the TRI TON s switches When you write the data the val ues of the corresponding program parameters will be rewritten ES The results of receiving these messages will depend on the instrument The operation may be different when a device other than the TRITON is connected Silencing all notes on a specific channel All note off CC 123 Bn 7B 00 value 00 When this is received all currently sounding notes on that channel will be turned off as though the keys had been released However the release portion of the notes will remain All sound off CC 120 Bn 78 00 value 00 When this is received all currently sounding notes on that channel will be silenced While the All Note Off message allows the release portion of the notes to remain the All Sound Off message will silence the notes immediately However these messages are provided for emergency use and are not something that you will use while per forming Resetting all controllers on a specific channel Reset all controllers CC 121 Bn 79 00 value 00 When this is received the value of all controllers on that channel will be reset Using RPN t
172. default settings song 000 will be selected for Step 01 and End will be selected for Step 02 POOL ON DOr ara a ee eri Paco NEW CUELIST 00 300 presen Sea mi LU ar Hea hee Press the Insert button three times Steps 01 04 will become active Select a song for each Step 01 04 Select S000 Intro for Step 01 S001 A for Step 02 S002 Bridge for Step 03 and S003 Ending for Step 04 In Repeat specify the number of times that the song at each step will repeat Set Step 01 to 02 Step 02 to 04 Step 03 to 02 and Step 04 to 01 If necessary check the Load FX check box This specifies whether or not the effect settings will also be changed when the song at that step is played If you want the effect settings to change check this box For this example check Step 01 amp Depending on the effect settings a certain amount of time may be required for the effects to be switched If this occurs the playback will not be smoothly connected from song to song To ensure a smooth transition from song to song check FX Load for Step 01 Do not check FX Load for the remaining steps This way the effect settings will be made before playback begins and there will be no time lag when cue list playback is started or when switching from song to song Although it will not be possible to change ef
173. details on expansion refer to p 237 in the Parameter Guide A maximum of 1 000 multisamples and 4 000 samples can be created In Disk mode you can load multisample sample data from a floppy disk or SCSI media when the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed Korg format or AKAI S1000 S3000 format sample data or AIFF or WAVE files can be loaded When this data is loaded into the TRITON it will all be handled as Korg format sample data The external audio source that you are sampling can be processed by the five insertion effects to apply effects such as compressor EQ or lo fi The LFO frequency or delay time of the effect can be specified as a BPM value which is highly effective when sampling phrase loops etc Both auto sampling and manual sampling can be performed With auto sampling recording will begin automatically when the input level exceeds a specified threshold In either method of sampling you can make pre trigger settings The audio input supports both mic and line level signals Data that is sampled can be immediately played from the keyboard It can also be converted into a program by a simple operation and used as an element of the TRITON s HI synthesis system Multisamples samples that have been converted into a program can be used in a combination or song The waveform can be viewed in the LCD screen and edited by a variety of waveform editing commands that include rate convert down sampling
174. disconnect the MIDI cable MIDI transmits a message called Active Sensing FE at regular intervals A device that receives this message will be aware that an external MIDI device is transmit ting to it Subsequently if no MIDI messages are received for a certain interval of time the receiving device will decide that the connection has been broken and will turn off any notes that had been sounded via MIDI and reset its controller values 121 Basic functions MIDI applications Playing the TRITON multi timbrally from an external device The TRITON can be connected to an external device and played multi timbrally in the following ways e MIDI messages from the external device can play a combination 8 part multi timbral performance You can change the overall settings programs levels and effects by using program change messages to switch combinations e MIDI messages from the external device can be used to play a song using the TRITON as a 16 part multi timbral tone generator However if the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock is INT it will not be possible to switch the overall settings e MIDI Clock messages from the external device can be used to make the TRITON playback a song set MIDI Clock to EXT and run the TRITON s sequencer Synchronizing the playback of the arpeggiator or sequencer You can change the overall settings programs levels effects by using song select messages to switch so
175. e Bank Change Enable Control Change and Enable After Touch each checked PTEE E usenet EEEE OR PG p 118 e If you wish to receive MIDI exclusive messages is the Global P1 MIDI Enable Exclusive item Checked ccccccccesccesscssecsscessccsscesseesseeseeeaes PG p 119 Does the TRITON support the types of messages that are being sent to it Can t format a floppy disk e Are you using a 2 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk e Is the floppy disk inserted correctly e Cover the write protect hole of the floppy disk so that it is in the write permit position Correctly insert a 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk with its write protect hole covered into the disk drive and format it once again Can s save load data to from a floppy disk e Is the floppy disk inserted correctly e Is the floppy disk formatted e Is the write protect hole of the floppy disk covered so that it is in the write permit position Correctly insert a 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk with its write protect hole covered into the disk drive and perform the save or load operation once again The TRITON does not recognize when MO media has been exchanged and does not correctly display the media information after the exchange e If you are able to switch the mode setting of your MO drive between PC AT and Mac settings please use PC AT mode For details on changing the mode of your drive refer to the owner s manual f
176. e accessed in P1 P9 The diagram below shows how a combination is structured Parameters for each timbre are found in P1 P4 Here you can bring programs together to create the basic combination Finishing touches can be added to the combination by using insert effects master effects and the master EQ Effect settings are made for the combination independently of the settings in Program mode To these settings you can add arpeggiator and controller settings to create the final combination Basic combination editing Combination editing refers to actions such as re selecting the program for a timbre to change the sound changing the keyboard area or velocity range that will sound the program for each timbre or making control ler settings Quick editing of a combination can be performed in the Program Select tab and Mixer tab of Combination PO Play but for detailed editing you will need to use Combination P1 P9 The parameters in P1 P9 will affect the combination that you selected in Combination PO In the pages that follow we will be modifying some of the representa tive parameters as we explain their function For details on all parameters refer to the Parameter Guide E The most effective procedure is to first use P1 Edit program Mixer to select the program for each timbre Then use P4 Edit Zone to specify the keyboard range for each program layer split velocity switch etc Finally adjust the volume of each timbre
177. e explanations are organized by mode page and tab Explanations and other informa tion on the effects and their parameters are also pro vided for each effect Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter appears in the display or when you need to know more about a particular function Voice Name List This lists the multisamples and drumsamples that are built into the TRITON prox TRITON pro and TRI TON and the factory preset combinations programs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Refer to these lists when you wish to know more about the preloaded sounds Conventions in this manual References to the TRITON proX TRITON pro and TRITON The TRITON proX TRITON pro and TRITON are col lectively referred to in this manual as the TRITON Switches and knobs References to the switches dials and knobs on the TRITON s panel are enclosed in square brackets References to buttons or tabs indicate objects in the LCD display screen aM Parameters in the LCD display screen Parameters displayed in the LCD screen are enclosed in double quotation marks Boldface type Parameter values are printed in boldface type Content that is of particular importance is also printed in boldface type Procedure steps Steps in a procedure are listed as O p m These indicate pages or parameter numbers to which you can refer Symbols 4 EE 0 These symbols respectively indicate cauti
178. e noss D aoss D noss D noo1 P e1 Roman AnalogSt Analo Category Bank Program Select the program for each timbre Selection of programs via MIDI program change is disabled in this page amp h If a program currently being edited in Program mode is used in a combination the combination will use the sound that is being edited Pan Specify the panning stereo location for each timbre A setting of C064 will reproduce the oscillator pan setting of the program Moving this to left or right will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan rela tionship between the oscillators A setting of L000 is far left and R127 is far right p 31 in the Parameter Guide Volume Adjust the volume of each timbre 1 8 Create the overall sound by adjusting the volume bal ance between timbres The Volume setting is an important aspect of creating the sound and this setting will have a significant effect on the overall impression produced by the combination P2 Edit Trk Param Settings for status MIDI channel and playing mode MIDI Channel tab COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch Ik Bank A Romance Layers Status Select a Status of INT for all timbres that you wish to use Select Off for unused timbres Timbres that are set to INT will sound the TRITON s internal tone generator Timbres set to Off EXT or EX2 will not sound Timbres set to EXT or EX2 can control
179. ect two mono effects in series 090 102 Double size effects amp Effects 000 089 can be selected for IFX1 2 3 4 5 or MFX 1 or 2 Effects 090 102 are double size effects and will use twice the processing area of other effects They can be selected for IFX2 IFX3 or IFX4 106 Effects in each mode In Program mode insert effects can be used as part of the sound creating process in the same way that the output sound of the oscillator OSC is processed by the filter and amp to create the final sound Then the master effects can be used to apply spatial type effects such as reverb The stereo 3 band master EQ located immediately before the OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs is used to make final adjustments in tone These settings can be made independently for each program Send Return Master Effect 1 2 k i OUTPUT Master EQ LIMONO R Oscillator _ Filter Amplifier Insert Effect 1 5 In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode insert effects can be used to help create the sound of each timbre track The master effects are used to apply overall spatial processing and the mas ter EQ is used to make overall adjustments in tone These settings are made in Combination mode inde pendently for each combination in Sequencer mode for each song and in Song Play mode for the entire mode Send Return Master Effect 1 2 je OUTPUT
180. ect the serial port COM port of the IBM PC compatible to the TRITON s TO HOST connector IBM PC compatible COM ie Special cable AG 001B TO HOST saaa al ETT amp If the serial port of your computer uses a 25 pin connector you will need to obtain a 9 pin 25 pin adapter In Global P0 Basic Setup set PC I F Baud Rate to 38 40 kBPS PC I F Baud Rate settings If you are using Windows install the Korg MIDI Driver For the installation procedure refer to Installing and setting up the Korg MIDI Driver p 129 Connecting an Apple Macintosh To connect an Apple Macintosh with the TRITON you will need a separately sold AG 002B connecting kit cable and Korg MIDI Driver software amp Macintosh computers that do not have a serial port modem printer cannot be connected to the TO HOST connector Use the special AG 002B cable to connect the modem port or printer port of the Apple Macin tosh to the TRITON s TO HOST connector Apple Macintosh Modem port or printer port _uleaGion Special cable AG 002B Hi monl E UT I amp If the application program sequencer you are using has a Clock setting set it to 1 MHz In Global P0 Basic Se
181. ed It will play back Keyboard amp Index when you play the highlighted in the Key board when you play the highlighted in the area You can use Sample Select to select the sample that you wish to edit When you do so the assign ment to the index will also change When you change indexes the waveform data for the sample assigned to that index will appear he Waveform data for a sample that was sampled with a Sampling Mode of Stereo will be dis played in two lines The upper line is the wave form display for the L channel and the lower line is for the R channel Specify the start address in Start the loop start address in LoopS and the end address in End Press Start it will be highlighted and use the VALUE controllers to change the setting The cor responding vertical line will move Set LoopS and End in the same way In the example shown below Start is immediately before the first wave form LoopS is immediately before the second waveform and End is set to an arbitrary location Start LoopS End ZZ By using the ZOOM buttons you can change the range that is displayed When Start is high lighted zoom will be performed from the start address p 88 in the Parameter Guide note If the Use Zero check box is checked only those addresses where the waveform data crosses the zero level will be found automatically when searching and can
182. ed 000 127 that use the MOSS tone generator For the program names refer to the owner s manual of the EXB MOSS option e Bank G contains 256 programs compatible with the GM2 sound map and nine drum programs This bank is read only Bank G consists of banks G g 1 2 g 9 and g d The 128 programs from 001 128 can be used G con tains the GM2 original programs g 1 g 9 allow you to select variation programs of the G bank pro grams g d lets you select drum programs ts For the preset program banks and program names refer to the separate Voice Name List Selecting and playing a combination In Combination mode you can select a combination from banks A D and play it Here we will show how to select preset combinations Select various combina tions and hear how they sound Selecting a combination Press the COMBI key the LED will light and you will enter Combination mode COMBI ES Make sure that P page 0 Play is selected in the LCD screen If this page is not selected press the MENU key to access the page jump menu and either press PO Play in the LCD screen or numeric key 0 to dis play PO Play button Combination Number name Popup button Bank Program Press Combination Number name in the LCD screen to select the combination The display will be highlighted Press a COMBI BANK A D key to select the bank p 24 Comb
183. ed to T6 and 7 When you play the keyboard the T3 program A012 Smooth Sine Lead will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern P000 UP The T6 program A020 House Kit will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U161 House 2 BD amp SD e The A and B Top Key and Bottom Key Combination P7 Scan Zone tab are set so that arpeggiators A and B will operate only for the C4 note and above e Arpeggiator B is assigned to T7 as well but this setting is so that the T6 program A020 House Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Refer to the preceding section Select and play Combination A003 Drum n Bass Kit Linking the arpeggiator to the combination If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combination to become active when that combination is selected check Combination for Auto Arpeggiator in the Basic tab of Global PO Basic Setup 100 Creating an user arpeggio pat tern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the TRITON s arpeggiator are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio pat terns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns There are five patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM The operation of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited p 29 Using the arpeggiator while you play User arpeggio patterns There are 232 patterns U000 A B U213 D which can develop chords or phrases in a wide var
184. een assigned to the note you played In Sampling mode you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the index that is assigned to the note you played Connections Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may damage your speaker system or cause malfunc Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks to the INPUT jacks of your powered monitor system etc SIONS L MONO and R are the main outputs If you are outputting in stereo make connections to the MAIN L MONO jack and the R jack If you are outputting in monaural make connections to the MAIN L MONO jack We recommend that you playback in stereo if possible O If you wish to output from the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 jacks connect these jacks to your mixer and then connect the mixer output to the INPUT of your powered monitor system etc 1 Connecting the power cable O Connect the included power cable to the AC power supply inlet of the TRITON and then connect the other end of the cable to an AC outlet 2 Connecting audio output devices For details on the output of each jack p 107 Routing Connect a set of amplified monitor speakers or your audio system to output the TRITON s sound 3 C e a 6 Connecting audio input he If you playback the TRITON through your stereo d g P audio system be aware that high volumes may evices damage your speakers Be caref
185. eft or right on this ribbon controller to control the pitch or modulation p 25 Various program parameters and effect parame ters will determine what is controlled by the rib bon controller swi sw2 J Headphone jack A set of headphones standard stereo phone plug can be connected here p 135 The output from the L MONO and R OUTPUT jacks can be monitored in stereo through the head phones Floppy disk drive Insert 3 5 inch 2DD double side double density or 2HD double side high density floppy disks here Edited data can be saved on a floppy disk and the factory preset data SMF data or multi sampling sampling data etc can be loaded from a floppy disk For details on handling floppy disks refer to Floppy disk handling p 95 Eject button To remove a floppy disk first make sure that the disk access indicator is dark and then press this button If the disk does not eject when you press this button do not attempt to remove the disk by force Please contact your dealer Disk access indicator Se Eject button Z2 EF Zs Introduction Front and rear panel 6 VOLUME slider This adjusts the volume that is output from the OUTPUT jacks L MONO R and the headphone jack VOLUME e REALTIME CONTROLS A LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE 2 ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABL
186. egin playing When the START STOP key is pressed in P5 Pattern RPPR the currently selected pattern will begin playing If you press the START STOP key during play back the playback will stop Press the START STOP key once again and play back will resume from where it had been stopped Pressing the LOCATE key will move to the specified location e Pressing the PAUSE key will resume playback e Pressing the lt lt REW FF gt gt keys will rewind or fast forward These can be used during playback or when paused The speed of rewind and fast forward is set by the FF REW Speed page menu command Mute Solo function You can use the PLAY MUTE REC buttons and SOLO ON OFF buttons in the Program Select tab of P0 Play REC to hear or mute a desired individual track 1 16 For example this can be used when you wish to record new tracks while listening only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded tracks You can use the page menu command Solo Selected Track to hear only the currently selected tracks It is convenient to use this while setting track parameters or effect settings p 47 in the Parameter Guide Make sure that page P0 Play Rec is opened Press the START STOP key to playback the song Press the Prog 1 8 tab Press the track 1 PLAY MUTE REC button once The display will change to MUTE and the play back of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way 62
187. either select Append or save the sample data to a floppy disk p 40 Press the OK button The data will be loaded in the order of PRE LOAD PCG PRELOAD SNG and PRELOAD KSC When the PRELOAD KSC file begins to load the following dialog box will appear Where is a NEWMS G KMP file 892K 01 03 1999 12 00 00 491K 01 03 1999 12 00 00 rem PRELOAD PCG Pl PRELOAD SNG PRELOAD KSC 40 01 03 1999 12 00 00 ORS gt EEE Con an Skip Cancel Select J The sample multisample data listed in PRE LOAD KSC is contained in TNFD 01P Remove the TNFD 00P floppy disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the TNFD 01P floppy disk Press the LCD screen once The LCD display will change The newly inserted floppy disk will be recognized when you press the LCD screen Press the Select button to resume loading 2 Selecting and playing a dem onstration song in Sequencer mode 2 Press the SEQ key the LED will light SEQ You will enter Sequencer mode aS J Q Press the MENU key MENU E The LCD screen will show a list of the pages in Sequencer mode SEQUENCER Jump a2 Pa Play REC Pt P2 P3 Cue List Trk Param MIDI Filter P4 P5 P6 Zone Ctrl Track Edit Pattern RPPR P P8 P9 Arpeggiator Insert Effect Master Effect For this example press either P0 Play REC or numeric key 0 The P0 Play REC page will appear
188. el Set the signal level from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 Normally you will set this to 127 If the sound is still distorted even when this level is lowered sig nificantly it is possible that the distortion is occur ring before the AD converter Adjust the rear panel LEVEL knob or the output level of your external audio source Pan Set the panning of the signal from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 When you are inputting a stereo audio source you will normally set Input 1 to L000 and Input 2 to R127 or Input 1 to R127 and Input 2 109 Basic functions Effects settings to L000 When you are inputting a monaural audio source you will normally set this to C064 BUS IFX Indiv Select In the same way as for the oscillator of a program specify the bus to which the external audio source from AUDIO INPUT jacks 1 and 2 will be sent Send 1 to MFX1 Send 2 to MFX2 In the same way as for the oscillator of a program specify the level at which the external audio source from AUDIO INPUT jacks 1 and 2 will be sent to the mas ter effects This setting can be made only if BUS IFX Indiv Select is L R or Off p 107 If BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to IFX1 5 this is set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert Fx tab after the sound has passed through the insert effects he If BUS IFX Indiv Select has a setting other than Off and you raise the Level value the external audio s
189. en you can select pages set parameter values rename pro grams and combinations write data and perform many other operations EZ References in the TRITON s owner s manual to the button or tab refer to objects displayed on the LCD screen References to the key knob dial or slider refer to controls on the front or rear panel of the TRITON e category Popup button i Page menu button A a Current page COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A a b Edit cell f Check box c Popup button 1 Key Sync m Keyboard g Radio buttons i a Current page This shows the page within the currently selected mode From the left this displays the mode name the page number name selected in the Jump page and the tab name Mode name Page number name Tab name COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A a b Edit cell When you press a parameter in the LCD screen the parameter or parameter value will sometimes be highlighted displayed in inverse video This is called the edit cell and the highlighted item will be subject to your editing The parameter value of the edit cell can be modi fied using the VALUE controllers p 13 or by using a popup button in the LCD screen For parameters that accept a key number or a velocity value you can also hold down the ENTER key and play a note on the keyboard to enter the key num
190. encer 122 Song Play 86 System exclusive data 94 System exclusive message 120 T Tab 11 12 Template Song 67 Tempo 64 71 99 Text edit button 11 The mode and page that will be se lected when the power is turned on 17 Timbre 35 Select the program for each tim bre 54 Time 64 68 Toggle button 11 Tone 101 Continue sounding 102 Specified pitch 103 Track 63 Track Edit 70 Track Play Loop 67 Transpose 34 55 119 125 Tremolo 47 50 Tune 34 119 Tuning 125 U Use DKit Setting 50 User arpeggio pattern 100 Chordal pattern 102 Drum pattern 103 Melody pattern 102 User Scale 126 User template song 37 V VALUE controller 13 VALUE slider 27 118 Velocity 27 46 Velocity crossfade 54 Velocity Curve 126 Velocity drumsample switching 91 Velocity multisample switching 46 Velocity switch 54 57 Velocity zone 57 Velocity Sample SW Lo gt Hi 91 Vibrato 47 Volume 36 116 Amp 49 Combination 54 Keyboard Track 50 Sampling 78 W Write 37 ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob 30 ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key 29 ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob 29 ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob 30 Global setting User drum kit Use arpeggio pattern 39 Program Combination 38 User template song 37 Z ZOOM button 82
191. er drum kits 00 A B 63 User User arpeggio patterns U000 A B U231 D User template songs Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings p 60 arpeggiator settings and effect settings can be saved Write to internal mem ory However the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Further more settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome Play Mute Track Play Loop including Start End Mea sure and RPPR settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode or Song Play mode page menu command Save as User Template Song to write this data p 48 in the Parameter Guide A If multisamples or samples from the RAM bank are used in the Multisample or Drum Kit of a pro gram you should be aware that these multisam ples or samples cannot be written into memory This means that if you turn the power of and then on once again programs or combinations that use such multisamples or samples will not sound as intended To reproduce such programs or combi nations the necessary multisamples or samples must be saved on external media such as floppy disk and then reloaded amp Data that you edit in Sequencer Song Play or Sam pling cannot be saved in internal memory by the Write operation Saving to external media floppy disk etc The following data can be saved on external media floppy disk etc If the sep
192. er to p 103 in the Parameter Guide z Next File Chain to next file _ Auto Start Playback using the Jukebox function The TRITON provides a Jukebox function that can be used to playback SMF data This function allows you to specify the order in which files in the same directory will be played he A jukebox list you create will be erased when the power is turned off and can not be recovered If you wish to keep your jukebox list refer to the sec tion Saving a Jukebox list next page and save it on external media Check the Jukebox check box Program 161 63 ae ee J 147 V Jukebox Select P3 Jukebox SONG PLAY P3 Jukebox Jukebox N rh KFo1 B4amiD B0 KF 1 010 FK 1 KF 1 030 Ph KFa1 asamD 62 KF 1 070 3 KF 1 050 64 KFG1 846 5 KF 1 080 86 KFG1 826 KFa1 868 KFG1 666 MID E KF 1 070 MID KF01 080 MID Add Delete DE label ae pe EAA If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and a hard disk etc is connected press the drive select button to select the drive that contains the data you wish to play back EE Use the scroll bar to display the SMF filename extension MID that will be played first and select that file Press the Add button The filename you specified in step will appear in the Jukebox list Select the file that will be played second and p
193. erate only in response to the notes that are echoed back and received at MIDI IN In this way turning off Local Control prevents the arpeggiator from operating 112 in duplicate Use this setting when you wish to record on the exter nal MIDI sequencer or computer only the notes that trigger the arpeggiator and to use the echoed back notes to operate the arpeggiator while monitoring your recording or during playback To turn off Local Control select the Global P1 MIDI and press the Local Control On check box to uncheck it p 117 in the Parameter Guide When using the TRITON by itself leave Local Control turned on If this is off when the TRITON is used by itself playing the keyboard will not produce sound kh If you want the note data produced by the arpeg giator to be recorded on the external sequencer computer set Local Control on and turn off the Echo Back setting of the external sequencer com puter Connecting a computer TO HOST connector By using a special cable to connect the TRITON s TO HOST to your computer and installing the Korg MIDI Driver you can play and control the TRITON from your computer Direct cable connections are pos sible with the following computers Connecting an IBM PC compatible To connect an IBM PC compatible with the TRITON you will need a separately sold AG 001B connecting kit cable and Korg MIDI Driver software Use the special AG 001B cable to conn
194. es Syne i i _O3 O4 tatn Keyboard Mier Arpega A Select combination B063 Echo Jamm and look at the Arpegg A tab and Arpegg B tab 32 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T timbre 4 and arpeggiator B is assigned to T timbre 2 When you play the keyboard the T4 program B068 Drum n Bass Kit will be sounded by the U168 Bigbeats 1 arpeggio pattern The T2 program B053 Funkin Guitar will be sounded by the U096 Stab Rhythm arpeggio pattern If you uncheck Arpeggiator Run A or Arpeggiator Run B the unchecked arpeggiator will stop If you check it once again and play the keyboard the arpeggiator will begin running The Scan Zone Key is set so that notes B3 and below will use arpeggiator A and notes C4 and above will use arpeggiator B These settings are made I Combination P7 Scan Zone A B tab parameters A and B Top Key and Bottom Key Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function The TRITON s Sequencer mode provides an RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function Using the RPPR function a note of the keyboard can be assigned to a preset pattern or user pattern anda track that will play the assigned pattern You can then playback the assigned pattern in realtime and record it if desired simply by playing a single note Preset patterns suitable for playing by the drum track are already provided in internal memory In this sectio
195. es already exist use Sample Select to select the sample that you wish to assign Repeat steps and to assign a sample to each index Complete the multisample in this way When you play the keyboard in the area of an index to which a sample has been assigned that sample will play back If you wish to first create two or more indexes for the multisample before you start sampling and then continue sampling for each of these indexes select the index for sampling in step and use either manual sampling or auto sampling to record a sample for that index Manual sampling or Auto sampling Create a multisample by selecting an index and then sampling Ee The number and order of the indexes in the multi sample the zone of each index and the original key location can be edited later if desired p 84 Multisample editing 81 Basic functions Sampling mode Loop settings With the default settings after the power is turned on the sounds you sample will automatically be looped P0 Recording page Preference tab Auto Loop On To edit the loop and other playback address settings for the sample use the P2 Loop Edit page Select P2 Loop Edit Str e FA hie HNE Keyboard amp Index Sample Select ari Ere ead iai 3 liop Tame sia bmi eal bata tec Ceres ese teat ee ee a _ Ba Zaro ZOOM button The waveform data for the currently selected sam ple will be display
196. ess the REC WRITE key or check the Remove Data check box to erase the specified musical data If you press the REC WRITE key during loop recording all musical will be removed from the cur rently selected track as long as you continue press ing the key By checking the Remove Data check box you can erase only the specified data During loop record ing press the note that you wish to delete and only the data of that note number will be deleted from the keyboard as long as you continue pressing that note Similarly bender data will be deleted as long as you tilt the joystick in the X horizontal direction and after touch data will be deleted as long as you apply pressure to the keyboard When you are once again ready to record musical data uncheck the Remove Data check box Press the START STOP key Playback will end and you will return to the record ing start location that you specified in step he If Loop All Tracks is selected normal playback will be looped as well Multi multitrack recording Multitrack recording can be used with overwrite over dub manual punch in or auto punch in recording methods Here we will explain the procedure for over write recording which is the most commonly used method Multitrack recording will record multiple tracks at once When simultaneously recording multiple tracks of MIDI data from an external sequencer etc Set the MIDI Clock Globa
197. essa watch onea aas nE Er etna 5 Rear panel sec osieiad wits teenie re TA ahs es 8 Names and functions of objects in the LCD SCFOGMN 5 is cc s Bisse oldlele ais a bie aouedeal bedded EENE 10 Basic operation of the TRITON 12 1 Selecting modes 000 eee eee eee 12 Selecting a page iien sires cece ri e eee 12 2 Selecting pages and tabs 005 12 Selecting lt a tabigs ssa d sees esata eae dae ets 12 VALUE controllers 0 00 eee eee 13 3 Setting a parameter 0 ee eee eee 13 BANK keys 0 00 c cee e eee eee 13 COMPARE key 00 00 e eee eee ee 14 Popup buttons and popup menus 14 Keyboard input 0 0 0 cece e eee eee 14 Connechonis s 2 00s fess BSS Naw ae 15 1 Connecting the power cable 15 2 Connecting audio output devices 15 3 Connecting audio input devices 15 4 Connecting pedals etc 0 eee 16 5 Connections to MIDI equipment 16 6 Connections to a computer 00 16 7 Connections to a SCSI device 5 16 Quick Start 17 Turning the power on off 17 1 Turning the power on 6 6 6 0 c eee eee 17 2 Turning the power off 00 000 ee 17 Listening to a demo song 18 1 Loading the demo song data in Disk mode 18 2 Selecting and playing a demonstration song in Se q
198. et Tempo Mode to Manu manual and as you listen to the metronome use J to set the tempo Set Meter to the desired time signature If necessary set Reso resolution to the desired realtime quantize setting p 68 This completes preparations for recording The recording procedure will depend on the Over write Multi multitrack recording setting explained below Press the REC WRITE key to temporarily cancel record standby mode and try out the various recording methods described below he The time signature will be recorded when you actually begin recording If you cancel recording during recording standby or during the precount the time signature specified in will not be recorded Overwrite Use this method when recording for the first time Make the necessary settings in Preparations for recording In the Preferences tab Recording Setup select Over Write SEQUENCER P Play REC Preference Location 901 01 000 Metr 4 4 4 120 Mms DIST HE NEW SONG D PR Recording Setuj Over Write O Over Dub O Manual Punch In Metronome Set Sound Only REC BUS Output Select L R Level 127 Precount Measure 2 Stale TEreres 1 In Location specify the location at which you wish to begin recording O Auto Punch In O Loop All Tracks 7 Muti REC If no musical data has been recorded it will not be possible to change the location
199. et to a higher value the over tones in the region of the cutoff frequency will be boosted as shown in the diagram below giving a dis tinctive character to the sound When resonance is applied Low Pass Level gt Low resonance value lt _ gt High resonance value Filter 1 Mod tab PROGRAM P3 Edit Filter pmm Keyboard Track zzz Key Low c i Key High of Ramp Low 00 ee High 18 faz Filter EG mam Velocity to A 37 Intensity to A Filter 1 Mod a intensity t to A 49 AMs JS v cc a2 pms Filter AZB Modulatiol Filter A AMS1 Velocity Filter1 Filter1 Filter Filter1 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 rutere Mod JUfo Mod EG Mod JUfo Mod A Controllers and the filter EG can be used to modulate the filter cutoff frequency that was specified in the Fil ter 1 tab By using a controller to vary the tone or by using an EG to create time varying changes you can add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Keyboard Track This varies the cutoff frequency according to the key board location that you play e When Ramp Low is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound darker e When Ramp High is set to a positive value the cutoff frequen
200. ew Ea an tests Comet aE In the above example musical events 32 measures of data will be created out of measures 1 4 which were being repeatedly played as a loop by track 1 Recording the arpeggiator If arpeggiator A or B is assigned to a track selected by Track Select and the arpeggiator is running the per formance of the arpeggiator will be recorded on the track For details on arpeggiator settings p 98 r p 105 ep 73 in the Parameter Guide Template Song The TRITON contains sixteen template songs These provide program and effect settings etc that are suit able for various styles of music When preparing to record you can load a template into your song to quickly and easily make appropriate settings For details on loading refer to Load Template Song p 48 in the Parameter Guide You can also make changes to a template song that you loaded and save frequently used settings as a User Template Song For the saving procedure refer to Save Template Song p 48 in the Parameter Guide amp Musical data will not be saved in the user template song 67 Basic functions Sequencer mode Copying combination sounds to multiple tracks You can copy a combination sound to multiple tracks to record it For the copy procedure refer to Copy From Combina tion p 48 in the Parameter Guide amp h If you wish to use the arpeggiator settings of a copied combination and record
201. ext volume of media p 141 in the Parameter Guide Select other medium MIDI data dump The programs combinations drum kits arpeggio pat terns and global settings of internal memory and songs cue lists and patterns can be transmitted as MIDI exclusive data and saved on a connected MIDI data filer computer or another TRITON we p 119 in the Parameter Guide 41 Basic functions Saving data Restoring the factory settings The factory setting data is referred to as the preload data and you can restore the factory settings for the TRITON s programs combinations and global settings by loading this preload data he This will rewrite any data that had been written before loading If you do not wish to lose this data you must first save it on a floppy disk or if the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed on external SCSI media p 40 Loading the preload data Insert the included TNFD 00P floppy disk into the floppy disk drive For details on floppy disk handling refer to Disk mode p 95 Press DISK You will enter Disk mode Press the Load tab You will move to the Load page and file informa tion will be displayed Press PRELOAD PCG The display will be high lighted 892K 61 03 1999 12 00 00 491K 81 63 1999 12 00 00 PRELOAD PCG PRELOAD SNG PRELOAD KSC 40 01 03 1999 12 00 00 D TEETE Ca f E iiA Utility A
202. f the arpeggio notes over a range of J Gate Specify the length gate time of each note in the arpeggio If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Gate setting for each step Global P6 Pattern Edit tab will be used he This is the setting that will apply when the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob is in the center posi tion 12 o clock When setting this parameter make sure that the knob is in the center position Velocity Specify the velocity of the notes in the arpeggio If this is set to Key the velocity with which you actually played the note will be used If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Velocity setting for each step Global P6 Pattern Edit tab will be used amp This is the setting that will apply when the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob is in the center position 12 o clock When setting this parameter make sure that the knob is in the center position fis When a preset user arpeggio pattern is selected setting the Gate or Velocity to Step will add a sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern Swing This adjusts the timing of the even num bered notes in the arpeggio counting from the first note to give the pattern a sense of swing Sort If this is checked the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of their pitch regard less of t
203. fect types within the cue list you can use dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as Effect Control to control the effects within the cue list for example applying reverb more deeply on certain songs or raising the LFO speed for a specific song We recommend this method if you will be using a cue list to construct the song When you execute the Convert to Song page menu command the effect settings of the Step 01 song will be specified for the song that results from the conversion Even if Load FX is not checked there may be cases in which a time lag in the transition between songs depending on the musical data of the song Also there may be cases in which the musical data is not played at the correct timing at the transition between songs If this occurs you can edit the musical data of the song or convert the cue list to a song for playback If you use Convert to Song to convert the cue list to a song there will be no time lag during playback at the transition between songs and the musical data will be played at the correct timing e Step The arrow will indicate the currently playing step indicates the currently selected Step If you set Current Step while stopped the display will change e Measure Indicates the starting measure of that step e Meter Indicates the currently playing time signature This cannot be changed This completes the settings Pres
204. finite number of levels in the analog signal are converted into digital data with a finite number of levels With 16 bit resolution each level is indicated in 65 536 steps the sixteenth power of two The greater the bit resolution is the closer to the origi nal analog signal the waveform in memory will be 48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as in audio devices such as DAT A CD uses 44 1 kHz 16 bit sam pling which is a slightly lower sampling frequency Samples and Multisamples Samples The data that is recorded sampled into internal mem ory or loaded from a file is referred to as a sample or sample file Samples consist of the actual waveform data and parameters that specify how the data will be played back such as Start Loop Start and End Address Samples can be used by multisamples and drum kits The TRITON can hold a maximum of 4 000 samples in its internal memory is The TRITON can share a single waveform among multiple samples This allows you to create multi ple samples with different playback addresses from the same waveform without wasting internal memory For example suppose that you have waveform data that records a voice saying One Two Three This single piece of waveform data could be shared by three samples with the play back of sample A producing One Two Three sample B producing One Two and sample C producing Two Three Refer to Copy Sample p 83 in the Para
205. form of a sample and create multisam ples Samples and multisamples created in this mode can be used by the oscillators of a drum kit or program S PLAY key In Song Play mode you can playback Standard MIDI Files from a floppy disk or external SCSI device when the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and play along with the playback GLOBAL key In Global mode you can make settings that affect the TRITON s entire system In this mode you can also create drum kits and arpeggio user patterns DISK key In Disk mode you can save TRITON data on a floppy disk or external SCSI media when the sep arately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and load data from the above listed media COMBI PROG T T SEQ SAMPLING CICE S PLAY GLOBAL DISK COMPARE COMPARE key Use this key when you wish to compare the sound of the program or combination that you are cur rently editing with the un edited sound that was written into memory You can also use this key to make before and after comparisons when recording or editing in Sequencer mode p 14 10 VALUE controllers VALUE The following VALUE controllers are used to set the value of the selected parameter p 13 Co ee 1 2 3 Coc CoCo ae VALUE slider Use this to modify the value of a parameter This controller is convenient when you wish to make large changes in the va
206. fter connecting the power supply cable to the TRITON connect the other end to an AC outlet p 15 POWER switch This switch turns the power on off p 17 SCSI connector separately sold EXB SCSI option Use a SCSI cable to connect SCSI compatible devices hard disk drives CD ROM drives etc here p 15 TO HOST connector A special cable sold separately AGO01B 002B can be connected from here directly to your com puter to transmit and receive musical data and sound settings etc p 112 MIDI THRU connector Musical data and sound settings etc that are received at the MIDI IN connector are re transmit ted without change from the MIDI THRU connec tor You can use this to connect multiple MIDI devices via MIDI cables p 111 MIDI OUT connector Musical data and sound settings etc are transmit ted from this connector Use this to control another connected MIDI device from the TRITON p 111 MIDI IN connector Musical data and sound settings etc are received at this connector Use this to play the TRITON from another con nected MIDI device p 111 DAMPER jack A separately sold switch type pedal such as the Korg DS 1H damper pedal can be connected here If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal If another switch type pedal is con nected it will function as a damper switch In order to ensure that the half damper pedal func tions correctly please adjust the
207. g a pro gram or in the Category Combination Select menu when choosing a combination Use To Program and To Combination to spec ify the writing destination program combination number Use the A V keys VALUE slider VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9 or ENTER key to make your selection Alternatively you can press the popup button and use the popup menu to specify the writing destination bank and program combi nation number To write the data press the OK button To cancel without writing press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure When you press the OK button once again the data will be written Using the REC WRITE key to write This method can only be used to write to the selected program combination number Press the front panel REC WRITE key The following display will appear The screen shown is for Program mode Update Program AGGA Noisy Stabber Are you sure Cancel J OK To write the data press the OK button To cancel without writing press the Cancel button About the Edit Buffer When you select a program or combination in Program PO Play and Combination P0 Play the program or combination data is called into the edit buffer When you modify the parameters in P0 Play or in the edit pages P1 P9 the changes you make will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this
208. g data Manual punch in With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data While the song is playing you can press the REC key or a connected pedal switch at the desired loca tion to start or stop recording e Auto punch in With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data First you must specify the area that will be re recorded Then playback the song and recording will occur automatically at the specified area Loop All Tracks This method lets you continue recording as you add musical data Recording will occur repeatedly over the specified area e Multi Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record onto multiple tracks each with a different channel This method can be used with overwrite overdub manual punch in and auto punch in recording Step recording This is a method of recording where you specify the note timing note length and velocity etc in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitches Only note on off data can be recorded with this method Event Edit and Create Control Data Note data is the only type of data that can be recorded in step recording However as ways to record other types of data outside of realtime you can use the Event Edit and Create Control Data functions Event Edit is intended as a way to edit previously recorded data but you can a
209. g mode The TRITON s effects can be applied to the external input sound The settings for Sampling mode are made independently within Sampling mode Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable switches Transmit data dumps of MIDI exclusive data Disk mode Data of each mode can be saved and loaded using the floppy disk drive or an external SCSI device when the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed Media such as floppy disks or hard disks when the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed can be formatted and data can be managed by copying etc Korg format sample data can be loaded and saved Akai AIFF and WAVE format sample data can be loaded Songs that you created in Sequencer mode can be saved in SMF format SMF files can be loaded as Sequencer mode songs You can use the Data Filer function to save load MIDI exclusive data Front and rear panel Front panel 1 SW1 key SW2 key These keys are on off switches for the functions to which they were assigned in Program Combina tion Sequencer Song Play and Sampling modes When on the LED will light p 25 Joystick This controls pitch or modulation etc Move the joystick up down or left right Y Y X X to control p 25 Various program parameters and effect parame ters will determine what is controlled by the joy stick Ribbon controller Slide your finger to the l
210. ggiator A B settings the arpeggio may not start when you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on p 31 Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob to adjust the tempo The J display in the upper right of the LCD will change The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40 240 You can also set the tempo by select ing J using numeric keys 0 9 to enter a tempo and pressing the ENTER key The tempo can also be set by the VALUE slider VALUE dial or A V keys The LED will blink in time with the specified tempo o TEMPO 120 40 240 The knob setting is saved when you write the pro 8 y P gram ES The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the Reso setting Program PO Arpeggio tab or Resolution P7 Arpeg Setup tab amp h If MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI is set to Exter nal MIDI or External PCI F the display will indi cate J EXT The tempo will be synchronized to an external MIDI device and it will not be possible to adjust the tempo on the TRITON 29 Quick Start Using the arpeggiator while you play Adjusting the length of the arpeggio notes Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob to adjust the length of the arpeggio notes Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the notes and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the notes At the center position 12 o clock the note length will be as specified by the pr
211. gin p 64 In Sampling mode pressing this key will make the LED light and if you then press the START STOP key sampling will begin p 80 In Program Combination and Global modes pressing this key will open a dialog box and if you then press the OK button the edited contents will be written p 38 p 39 START STOP key This is the start stop key for song or cue list recording and playback in Sequencer mode and SMF playback in Song Play mode During record ing and playback the LED will blink in time with the beat In Sampling mode press the REC WRITE key LED lights and then press the START STOP key to start stop sampling In Sampling P1 press ing this key the LED will light will sound the sample SEQUENCER eC A R P E G G AT C R PAUSE lt lt REW FF gt gt TEMPO GATE VELOCITY 120 cI oS ip CCIE ATR AT LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP s oi S on ON OFF CICC Y C 240 16 ARPEGGIATOR These knobs control the performance of the arpeg giator in realtime p 29 TEMPO knob This adjusts the base tempo of the arpeggiator and sequencer GATE knob This adjusts the gate time note duration of the arpeggio notes At the center position 12 o clock the gate time will be the same as the Gate parameter of the arpeggiator Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the gate time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the gate time Introductio
212. gio Pattern to copy the drum kit or user arpeggio pat tern to an unused number About the pages in Global mode For details on how to enter each page or modes refer to Basic operation of the TRITON p 12 PO Basic Setup Basic settings for the entire TRITON Audio input settings for use outside of Sampling mode MIDI MIDI related settings for the entire TRI TON Controller Controller settings for the pedals etc con nected to the rear panel User Scale User registered scale settings Specify 16 octave scales and one all note scale Category Name Edit category names for programs and combinations Drum Kit Edit drum kits User Arpeggio Edit user arpeggio patterns 89 Basic functions Global mode Creating a drum kit About drum kits A drum kit assigns a drumsample PCM waveform data for a drum to each key and specifies adjustments in pitch and level etc for each sample The TRITON contains 73 drum kit memory areas With the factory settings 00 15 A B contain preset drum kits suitable for various styles of music ROM memory areas 64 72 GM contain nine different drum kits compatible with the GM2 sound map For the factory preset drum kits refer to the separate Voice Name List In Global P5 Drum Kit you can modify these preset drum kits or create your own original drum kit from an initialized condition You can also create original
213. gives you minute control over every aspect of the sound Effect section e Five insertion effects stereo in stereo out two master effects mono in stereo out and a three band master EQ stereo in stereo out can all be used simultaneously You can select from 102 types of effect algorithm and edit them e Highly flexible effect routing is possible Effects can also be routed freely to the individual outputs Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modula tion e The synthesis section filter etc provides Alternate Modulation functionality and the effect section provides Effect Dynamic Modulation functionality This allows you to freely apply modulation to parameters that affect the pitch filter amp EG LFO and effects etc e LFO and delay time etc can be synchronized to MIDI clock tempo You can synchronize sounds or effects to the tempo of the sequencer or the arpeggiator Programs and combinations In preset ROM the TRITON provides 640 user programs and 256 programs 9 drumsets for GM2 compatibility When shipped from the factory it contains high quality preset programs that cover a wide range of musical needs The 640 user programs can be modified by adjusting the numerous editing parameters the effects and the arpeggiator to create your own original pro grams When the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed 128 programs for the Korg MOSS tone generator will also be available e For use as t
214. gram using the Convert MS to Program page menu command and these programs can be used immediately in a combination or song Sampling frequency and bit resolution As shown in the diagram sampling reads the level of the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis and stores the levels in memory as digital data Level Analog waveform 48kHz 48 000 times every second 0 0208 mS cycle 16bit 65 536 levels of data Sampled digital waveform Time RAM SIMM memory 16 MB expandable to 64 MB AUDIO INPUT jack Analog digital convertor Analog signal Digital signal Digital analog convertor jack AUDIO OUTPUT Sample 0000 3999 DAC Digital signal Analog signal Used by combinations and songs _ Program CE Multisample 000 999 RAM internal memory 76 Floppy disk SCSI media Disk mode The fixed intervals mentioned above are generally expressed as the sampling frequency 48 kHz kilo hertz means that sampling is performed 48 000 times each second and that the interval is 1 second 48 000 times approximately 0 00002083 seconds approximately 0 02083 mS millisecond The higher the sampling frequency is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be Each level is read and converted into digital data The accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolu tion The in
215. gs after turning the power off be sure to write the data There are two ways to write global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns he Before you write a user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern the Global mode memory protect setting must be turned off Memory protect amp The user arpeggio pattern settings Tempo Pat tern Octave Resolution Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard are parameters that are set independently in Program Combination Song and Song Play mode These settings are not saved when you perform the Write operation described here If you moved from Program or Combination mode and set these parameters you must return to the original mode and write them Using a page menu command to write To write global settings Global P0 P4 press the page menu command Write Global Setting in Global P0 P4 The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear To write user drum kits press the page menu com mand Write Drum Kits in Global P5 The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear To write user arpeggio patterns press the page menu command Write Arpeggio Patterns in Glo bal P6 The Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box will appear The same dialog box will also appear if in each of the above pages you hold down the ENTER key and press the 0 key 39 Basic functions Saving data The example shown is for Write A
216. h as 640 MB MO disks etc Cautions when handling floppy disks When handling floppy disks please observe the fol lowing points Data loss may occur if a floppy disk is handled improperly Floppy disk type and format The TRITON can use 2HD or 2DD 3 5 inch floppy disks Floppy disk handling Do not open the shutter of a floppy disk or touch the magnetic surface inside the disk If the magnetic disk becomes soiled or scratched it will no longer be possible to read data e Never transport the TRITON with a floppy disk in the disk drive Vibration may cause the disk drive heads to scratch the floppy disk making it unusable Do not allow a floppy disk to be placed near a device that emits a magnetic field such as a television computer computer display speaker or power supply transformer This can erase data on the disk Do not use or store floppy disks in locations of excessive temperature or humidity in direct sunlight or in dusty or dirty locations Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk e While the disk drive is operating do not attempt to remove the floppy disk and do not subject the TRITON to physical shock Floppy disk write protect Floppy disks have a small write protect hole that can be used to prevent data from being erased or rewritten accidentally After saving data to disk move the write protect tab so that the hole is uncovered This will prohibit writing to the disk and will
217. he order in which the notes were actually played on the keyboard ON If this is unchecked the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order in which they were actually played on the keyboard OFF Sort OFF UP iG ag Zos eee nese ON UP Il e Latch If this is checked the arpeggio will con tinue playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard If this is unchecked the arpeggio will stop when you remove your hand from the keyboard Key Sync If this is checked the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you play a note after having released all notes This setting is suit able when you are playing in realtime and want the arpeggio to start at the beginning of the measure If this is unchecked the arpeggio pattern will always be synchronized to the tempo of the MIDI clock For details on synchronization refer to About arpeggiator synchronization p 105 Keyboard If this is checked the notes you play on the keyboard will be heard as well as the arpeg giated notes If this is unchecked only the arpeggiated notes will be heard These are linked to the identically named parame ters in the PO Arpeggio tab They can be edited in the same way from either location fi You can use the Copy Arpeggiator page menu command to copy arpeggiator settings from another program or combination p 23
218. he oscillator of a drum program the TRITON provides 64 user drum kits and nine GM2 compatible ROM drum kits With the factory settings preset drum kits that cover a variety of musical genres are provided You can create your own original drum kits by assigning a drumsample or an original sampled sound to each note of the keyboard For each note you can make filter and amp settings and even route the sound through effects and to a individual audio output e It s easy to create a program using samples multisamples that you sampled in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode These programs can also be used in combinations or songs Samples can also be used as drum instruments in a drum kit e The TRITON provides 512 user combinations With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preset combinations A combination allows you to use layers splits or velocity switches etc to combine up to eight pro Introduction Introducing the TRITON grams together with effects and two arpeggiators in order to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a program You can also make settings that include external tone generators Sampling The TRITON provides 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono ste reo sampling functionality 16 Mbytes of memory are provided as standard allowing approximately 2 min utes 54 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sampling When expanded to a maximum of 64 Mbyte
219. he same time that the PCG file is loaded Press the OK button and the date will be loaded Never attempt to remove the media while data is being loaded AKAI format program file a AKAI format sample file IA 93 Basic functions Disk mode Loading a PCG file from the floppy disk included with a separately sold EXB PCM series option When loading EXB PCM series programs and combi nations use the following procedure When doing so you will specify the loading destination bank C D in step To load the data into bank C select C_BANK PCG To load the data into bank D select D_BANK PCG When you load C_BANK PCG the programs and combinations of banks A B and C all drum kits all user arpeggio patterns and global setting data will be loaded into the internal memory area of the TRITON and any prior data will be overwritten When you load D_BANK PCG the programs and combinations of banks A B and D all drum kits all user arpeggio patterns and global setting data will be loaded into the internal memory area of the TRITON and any prior data will be overwritten he If you wish to keep the data that is in the internal memory area use Save All or Save PCG to save it before loading other data 94 Saving data For the procedure of saving data to a floppy disk or to external SCSI media refer to Saving on external media p 40 Types of data that
220. he sound has passed through the insert effects 114 e When you operate the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON messages will be transmitted on the MIDI channel selected by Track Select However messages will be transmitted only if the track selected by Track Select has a Status of BTH EXT or EX2 p 46 in the Parameter Guide Track Select MIDI e When the sequencer is played back musical data of tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 will be transmitted on the specified MIDI channels e Tracks whose Status is INT or BTH will receive channel messages of the matching MIDI channel p 55 104 in the Parameter Guide Status and MIDI Channel Note on off Note on 9n kk wv Note off 8n kk wv n channel kk note number vv velocity When you play a note on the TRITON s keyboard it will transmit note on off messages When the arpeg giator is running note on off messages will be trans mitted by the arpeggiator If Local Control is off the arpeggiator will not transmit note on off data p 112 Local Control On settings However most instruments do not receive or transmit note off velocity and neither does the TRITON Program Change Bank Select Changing the program bank Program change Cn pp n channel pp program number that allows 128 sounds to be selected e Programs 000 127 in banks A B C D E and F correspond to program changes Cn
221. hen play back the recorded performance to sound the TRITON s tone generator i e using the TRITON as an input key board and MIDI tone generator To do this connect the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN connectors of the TRITON and your external MIDI sequencer computer to each other Sequencer Computer MIDI interface MIDI IN i 7 MIDI OUT a MIDI OUT 1 MIDI IN im IAA ell it Local Control On settings When connections are made as shown above turn on the Echo Back function of the external MIDI sequencer or computer so that data received at MIDI IN will be re transmitted from MIDI OUT and turn off the TRI TON s Local Control setting so that the TRITON s keyboard and tone generator will be internally discon nected When you play the keyboard of the TRITON the musical data will be transmitted to the external MIDI sequencer or computer and then echoed back to play the TRITON s tone generator In other words by turning Local Control OFF you can prevent notes from being sounded in duplicate as would otherwise occur if a note were sounded by the TRITON s own key board and again by the data that was echoed back If the arpeggiator function is on playing the TRITON s keyboard will not cause the arpeggiator to operate and only the musical data produced by playing the keyboard will be transmitted The arpeggiator will op
222. hes m ka db ch bee D Pe bdn iei mb ral ien si n imei epee ipo le pm mi bye rham deh ire rae Hap You will be asked for the drive and directory Insert the floppy disk containing the Korg PC I F Driver AG 001B and input the drive name For example if your floppy disk drive is A type A my 129 Appendices Korg MIDI Driver Click the OK button and then click OK again ard gee cone Ha gic hey peur hiarr per ieta doni krass ahh moka era cich DF Tha Di Piri Dh rik mahi bid dri h ai bliki d Makir Make settings as described in Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver below and click the OK button ira all i B 3 CEECEE CEET C Ham Erz G Mepis Chingi Oe E dad l hamp F linbo Charge OMT Tres Fark alert oe Dinar F Urea Meese C owe i pob Kas Marira E Peckunr D dependent Spa MEM Dai T w Cancel Be sure to restart your computer so that the new driver becomes effective a Usd sirg ap yar ara hanina ym mari aad ener ant mapin De mia mr erT ea cc e Korg MIDI Driver settings In Control panel double click the Multimedia icon and the Multimedia Properties dialog box will appear Click the Advanced tab located at the upper right Click the located at the left of MIDI Devices and Instrnments the display will change to and click KORG PC I F MIDI Port Then click the Properties button
223. his name can be edited using the Rename Sample page menu com mand If you execute sampling when an existing sample such as 0000 NewSample_0000 is selected the new sample will be sampled to a vacant sample number You do not need to be concerned with this setting even when you continue recording successive sam ples Select the Sample Mode Monaural source If the Audio Input SAM PLING setting Pan is L000 set Sample Mode to L Mono If Pan is R127 set Sample Mode to R Mono Stereo source Set the Sample Mode to Stereo Press the REC WRITE key If an input signal is present the Recording Level dB meter will move according to the Pan setting in Audio Input SAMPLING This is the recording standby condition In the case of Connections and settings for a mon aural source the L meter will move In the case of Connections and settings for a stereo source the L and R meters will move Use the Recording Level dB slider to adjust the level For this example set the slider to the 0 0 set ting p 82 in the Parameter Guide At the moment that you wish to begin sampling press the START STOP key Sampling will begin Sampling will stop when you press the START STOP key once again amp Sampling will stop automatically when the remaining amount of memory reaches zero Play the C2 note on the keyboard The sample you recorded w
224. hrough banks G g 1 g 9 g d and back to G Bank G contains 128 programs for the basic GM sounds Banks g 1 g 9 contain variation sounds Bank g d contains drum programs In banks which contain no variation sounds the basic GM sounds will be selected An asterisk will be added to the beginning of the program name 4 13 Introduction Basic operation of the TRITON Go01 Acoustic Piano g 1 001 Acoustic Piano w g 2 001 Acoustic Piano d 2 g 3 001 Acoustic Piano 4 g 4 001 Acoustic Piano g 9 001 Acoustic Piano g d 001 STANDARD Kit Go01 Acoustic Piano COMPARE key Use this key when you wish to compare an edited pro gram or combination sound with the un edited origi nal i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this key The LED will light and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE key once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the COMPARE key i e the settings that are written into memory the LED will go dark and it will not be pos sible to return to the previous settings by pressing the COMPARE key again In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE key to make before and after comparisons immediately afte
225. ich you actually played the notes Letting the arpeggio continue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard You can select whether the arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand off the keyboard or whether the arpeggio will stop playing when you take your hand off the keyboard Press the Latch check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked The arpeggio will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard Unchecked The arpeggio will stop playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your key board timing You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the keyboard or whether it will always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo Press the Key Sync check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked When you take your hand completely off of the keyboard and then play the first note on the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning This setting is suitable when you want the arpeggio to start from the beginning of the measure as you are playing in realtime Unchecked The arpeggio will always be synchro nized to the MIDI clock tempo Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you play Press the Keyboard check box to make this set ting Checked The notes you play on the keyboard and the notes played by the arpeggiator will both sound Unchec
226. iety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing at which you play them These patterns can be edited With the factory settings U000 A B U199 A B con tain a diverse assortment of arpeggio patterns the separate Voice Name List In Global P6 User Arpeggio you can modify these user arpeggio patterns or create a new user arpeggio pat tern from an initialized condition Edited user arpeg gio patterns can be written to internal memory areas U000 A B U231 D In Disk mode they can also be saved on external media such as a floppy disk p 39 p 40 amp U200 C U215 C and U216 D U213 D are pro vided as preset arpeggio patterns for certain sepa rately sold EXB PCM series option boards Editing a user arpeggio pattern When you wish to edit an user arpeggio pattern first turn off memory protect by unchecking the Memory Protect user arpeggio pattern check box in the Preference tab of Global PO Basic Setup If you move here from Program mode your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected program In Program mode select a program for which the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is selected or a program that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio pattern Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn on the arpeggiator the LED will light Even if you moved to Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you ca
227. ify the oscillator routing the signal sent to the insert effects master effects and independent outputs p 107 P9 Edit Master Effect Master Effect settings Here you can select master effects and make settings for them The master EQ is also set here p 108 More about Alternate Modula tion Alternate Modulation is a type of modulation that can be used to control various aspects of the sound AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the numerous sources that can control alternate modu lation and includes controllers such as the joystick or ribbon controller that you physically operate incom ing MIDI data as well as modulators such as the EG or LFO Since the TRITON allows you apply modulation to a modulator this type of control is referred to as alter nate modulation Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed or depth to which AMS will control alternate modula tion Combinations that are frequently used in sequencer performance such as using the joystick or ribbon con troller to vary the pitch are also provided as special parameters separately from alternate modulation The TRITON provides 29 types of alternate modula tion In single mode you can use 29 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types and in double mode you can use 55 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types There are 42 AMS sources However depending on the type of modulation some sources cannot be sele
228. ill play back If you wish to continue recording samples repeat steps 80 Auto sampling There are two ways to record a sample manual and auto With auto sampling will begin when the input signal exceeds the specified threshold level For details on manual sampling refer to Manual sampling p 79 In the PO Recording select the Input Setup tab SAMPLING P Recording Input Setup aa pace Audio Input SAMPLING samme Input Level BUS IFX Select L R Pan LOO _BUSCIFX Select L R Input2 Level 127 i Pan R127 m Recording Setup m Auto Threshold 28 dB O Manual Sri Use the Recording Setup radio buttons to select Auto This will select auto recording mode Set the Threshold When the input signal exceeds the Threshold level sampling will begin automatically The black triangles at both sides of the Recording Level dB meter display will indicate the specified level EG When you use auto sampling the attack portion of the sampled input sound may be lost depending on the Threshold setting If this occurs you can use Pre Trigger REC to sample the sound that occurs before sampling actually begins Normally you will set this to 0 and use it only when neces sary In P0 Recording select the Recording tab Select the MS multisample refer to Manual sampling step Select the sa
229. ination banks of the TRI TON For example to select bank A press the A key The LED will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank A We COME BANK A When the edit cell is located at the Bank Pro gram of a timbre 1 8 pressing a BANK key will allow you to select the program bank for that tim bre and the LED of the program bank selected for that timbre will light If you wish to select a combi nation bank make sure that the edit cell is not located at the Bank Program of timbres 1 8 Use numeric keys 0 9 to input the combination number and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can use the VALUE dial or A V keys to make a selection If you press the 10 s HOLD key to turn on the 10 s Hold function the LCD screen will indicate ED the ten s place of the combination number will be fixed and you will be able to switch combina tions simply by pressing a single numeric key Each time you press a numeric key the one s place will change You can also use the A V keys to change the ten s place To defeat the 10 s Hold function press the 10 s HOLD key once again Selecting combinations from Bank Combination Select You can select combinations from a list organized by combination bank Press the Combination Number name popup button A tabbed Bank Combination Select popup menu will appear Bank Combinatio
230. ination or turning the power off p 38 An example of editing As an example here s how to do some simple editing on combination Bank A064 ModernPiano Press the COMBI key to enter Combination mode Select preset combination Bank A064 ModernPi ano COMBINATION P Play Program Select EEk Cat Bank A J 120 0064 ModernPiano Timbre 2 Timbre 1 This combination layers simultaneously sounds the programs of timbre 1 and timbre 2 Timbre 1 sounds B001 Attack Piano a piano with a crisp attack Timbre 2 sounds B081 Vintage EP a classic electric piano These two programs are layered to produce a piano type sound that you may have heard in various contexts ED A timbre consists a of program together with mul tiple parameters that control that program A com bination can use up to eight of these timbres Selecting the program for a timbre Press the Prog Select tab When a timbre s Status is turned Off the pro gram assigned to that timbre will not sound If the Status is set to INT the program will sound Try setting timbres 1 and 2 alternately to INT and Off and listen to the result Only timbre 1 will sound Taz pa iiig Gi eee Ch Gch ereet eee Ey im AAA p A Bens Bell Ma Poal eyb nk Program Bal Blow DESH jesa Jes1 gt eens DESH Jaee Attack P hin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Acoustic Acous
231. independently for each program combination and song In Sampling mode and Song Play mode the functions of these keys are set for the entire mode You can specify the function that will be performed by the SW1 and SW2 keys and can also select between Toggle when the function will be switched on off each time the SW1 or SW2 key is pressed and Momentary when the function will be on only while you continue holding the SW1 or SW2 key These settings are made by Panel Switch Assign in the following pages Program P1 Edit Basic Controller Setup P4 Edit Zonr Ctrl Control Combination Song P4 Zonr Ctrl Controller Setup Sampling mode P4 Controller Setup Song Play mode P2 Controller Setup E When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is mem orized ES You can use these keys as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example in which the SW1 key is specified as an effect dynamic modulation source for a program and used to control an effect refer to p 110 i If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 38 p 39 and the Parameter Guide p 48 and 102 However the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME
232. ing on a pattern eeta ie AAE E EE eo Gear 63 Realtime recording on a track 64 Realtime recording to a pattern 68 Step recording on a track or pattern 69 Editing sfascicatt ita ses eceutia E Ea was 70 Track editing is0 4 30 orria eitinn vegans 70 Pattern editing ikenen ei ede ee 70 Sone editing 3 2335 shad sear cia ks Shand 70 Creating and playing a Cue List 70 RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function ae e A Paarl inl aed Hi cede 72 RPPR settings 2 3 22 0s ee ea serene de etek oe os 72 RPPR playback 0 6 eee eee 73 Realtime recording an RPPR performance 73 Sampling mode 2eeeeee 75 Features of sampling mode 5 75 Pages in Sampling mode 0 0055 76 How Sampling mode is organized 76 In Sampling mode n onanan eee eee eee 76 Samples and Multisamples 77 Sampling recording asample 78 Preparations for sampling 5 78 Manual sampling 000 c cece eee 79 Auto sampling 6 0 c cece cece eee 80 Creating multisample indexes and SAMPLING a6 fe ak eek Le hee SRS 81 Loop settings daine 384 pe hi E EE eels 82 The grid display 6c eee eee eee 82 Sample waveform data editing 83 Multisample editing 0 00 eee ee 84 Editing the indices 000 eee 84 Modifying the settings of an index
233. input source For input sources with a low input level such as a microphone select the MIC position For other sources select the LINE position he The AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch affects both the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks The AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob will be adjusted later For now set it near the center In Sampling mode P0 Recording select the Input Setup tab SAMPLING P Recording pm Audio Input SAMPLING sum Input Level BUS IFX Select L R Pan Input2 Level 127 Pan R12 m Recording Setup auto Manual Count Down REC off Input Setup aa _BUSCIFX Select L R In Audio Input SAMPLING set various parameters that specify how the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jack will be received e Level adjusts the volume Normally you will set this to 127 e Pan adjust the panning For this example set it to L000 78 e Set BUS IFX Select If you wish to use the TRITON s insert effects to process the incoming sound select IFX1 5 here For this example select L R The input sound will be sampled just as it is Be aware that when you change the setting from Off to L R or IFX1 5 the volume level in the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and in the headphones may rise excessively Input 1 controls the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and Input 2 controls the AUDIO INPUT 2 jack The settings up to this point will cause the sound from
234. ion to modify the volume First make Oscillator settings P1 Edit Basic to select a multisample waveform that will be the basis of the sound Then make pitch settings P2 Edit Pitch filter settings P3 Edit Filter and amplifier settings P4 Edit Amp to create the basic program This is the pro gram as it is used in Combination Sequencer or Song Play mode To this you can add insert effect settings P8 Edit Insert Effect master effects and master EQ settings P9 Edit Master Effect to add finishing touches to the sound You can also make arpeggiator settings P7 Edit arpeggiator and controller settings P1 Edit Basic Controller tab to create the final pro gram E For programs that are used in Combination Sequencer and Song Play mode settings for insert effects master effects master EQ arpeggiator and controllers must be made separately from the set tings made in Program mode Program Basic P1 1 OSC1 LFO1 P5 1 J Ie ile 2a OSC Basic P1 2 3 Filter1 A B P3 1 Han Level Pan P4 1 4 OSC1 LFO2 P5 2 ft 4 Filteri Mod P3 2 Ampi Mod P4 2 H lOSC1 Pitch Mod P2 1 Filteri LFO Mod P3 3 Filter EG P3 4 Ampi EG P4 3 Pitch EG P2 3 Controller Setup P1 4 Arpeggiator P7 Routing P8 1 1 Insert Effec
235. isample the following multisamples are available e 425 internal multisamples ROM e Expanded multisamples when a separately sold EXB PCM series board is installed SAMPLING MODE AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT Multi Sample a 2 Sample Insert Effect Sample IFX1 Sample GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT Key Assign Drum Sample Sample H Drum Sample Sample L ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN User Pattern PO 4 m User Pattern U00 95 e Multisamples RAM created in Sampling mode Create drum programs using a drum kit created in Global mode Combination mode e Select and play combinations A combination is a set of two or more programs a maximum of eight and allows you to produce complex sounds that could not be created by an individual program You can choose combinations from rewritable banks A B C and D which contain a total of 512 combina tions e Edit a combination Make settings for volume pan layer split etc for each timbre program and make settings for effects and the two arpeggiators etc Sequencer mode e Use the 16 track sequencer to record and playback songs e Make effect settings for the song e You can record a performance using the arpeggiator s into a song or pattern PROGRAM Multi Sample H Insert Master Effect Drum Kit Multi Sample L PITCH1 FILTER1 AMP1 Multi Sample H
236. ive data can be transmitted and received When you change modes on the TRITON a mode change message will transmitted When you change programs or combinations the parameters for one program or one combination will be transmitted together with the program change When you edit individual parame ters parameter change drum kit parameter change or user arpeggio pattern parameter change messages will be transmitted When these messages are received the same editing operation will be performed as on the transmitted device After MIDI exclusive data has been received and pro cessed a Data Load Completed message will be trans mitted The control master device must not transmit the next message until this message is received or until a sufficient interval of time has elapsed When you change programs or combinations or use parameter changes to edit the changes will affect the data in the edit buffer and will not be stored in internal memory unless you Write so that the changes will be lost if you re select the program or combination The Write operation can be performed by a MIDI exclusive Program Write Request or Combination Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using the TRITON s switches p 37 Saving data If notes are stuck If for some reason notes become stuck and will not stop sounding you can usually stop the sound by changing the mode If notes played via MIDI are stuck you can
237. ked Only the arpeggio notes will sound Other settings for the arpeggiator You can also set Gate Velocity Swing and Scan Zone These parameters are set in Program P7 Arpeggiator p 97 Linking the arpeggiator to programs You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings writ ten in a program will change when the program is switched check Auto Arpeggiator or whether the state of the arpeggiator will not change uncheck Auto Arpeggiator With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the program sound This setting is made in Auto Arpeggiator Global PO Basic tab Creating an user arpeggio pattern Arpeggio patterns that you create can be written to U000 231 These can be created in Global P6 User Arpeggio p 100 Using the arpeggiator as you play in Combination mode In Combination mode the TRITON provides dual arpeggiators allowing you to run two arpeggio pat terns simultaneously Press the COMBI key to enter Combination mode and select a combination p 23 Select ing and playing a combination As you select various combinations you will notice that the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light for some combinations p 32 Linking the arpeggiator to combinations When you press the keyboard the arpeggiator will start For other combinations you can press the
238. l P1 MIDI MIDI Clock to External MIDI or External PCI E so that the TRITON will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the external sequencer p 122 Make settings as described in Preparations for recording p 64 MIDI data of the corresponding MIDI channel will be recorded on each track whose PLAY MUTE REC button is set to REC This has no relation to the settings in Preparations for recording step 66 When using multitrack recording refer also to Multi Rec p 50 of the Parameter Guide In the Preference tab Recording Setup select Over Write Check the Multi REC check box Breer deg Soho ml eee write Diaan Pad ie J Cover ak Hea Pach In Hull AEC Press the Program T01 08 tab and Program T09 16 tab The PLAY MUTE REC button display of all tracks will read REC Press the PLAY MUTE REC button to change PLAY to MUTE for any tracks that you do not wish to record In P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch tab MIDI Channel specify the MIDI channel for each track The specified channel of musical data will be recorded on that track It is a good idea to set tracks 1 16 to MIDI channels 1 16 This is the default set ting Also make sure that Status is set either to INT or BTH In Location specify the location at which record ing will begin It will not be possible to change the location if the song is being recorded for
239. l be 64 measures If you continue record ing for longer than 64 measures the song length will be updated to the measure at which you stopped recording lawi Pater e or lhe HI a Pere Be Low Heer dg Lat Prete Camre OE Record a bass phrase on track 2 Select a bass program for track 2 In Track Select chose Track 02 and use realtime recording During recording track 1 will continue repeating measures 1 4 While listening to the drum phrase record for example an eight measure bass phrase When you are finished recording check Track Play Loop for track 2 also as you did in step Set Loop Start Measure to 001 and Loop End Measure to 008 Next we will record synth brass riffs on track 3 Select a synth brass program for track 3 Use Track Select to select Track 03 and use realtime record ing During recording track 1 will continue repeat ing measures 1 4 and track 2 will continue repeating measures 1 8 Ee Track Play Loop will continue repeating for the length of the song If you wish to specify the num ber of times that playback will repeat or to place different musical data drum fill in etc in the track the song will have to be expanded as musi cal data To specify the number of times that play back will repeat execute the P5 Track Edit page menu command Repeat Measure Pipihi Pairs af lea AN Fig Mere BET bi ki ot Pijini d T
240. l be Write Power On on the settings are called saved in internal memory into the memory area Internal Memory X Arpeggio Global Setti obal Setting Drum Kit Pattern 40 Saving on external media For details on the data that can be saved on external media floppy disk etc p 37 Types of data that can be saved M Song data patterns and cue lists in the TRITON s Sequencer mode and multisamples and samples in Sampling mode cannot be written into internal memory This data will disappear when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it on a floppy disk or on other external SCSI storage media if the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed Other types of data can also be saved on a floppy disk or if the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed on external SCSI storage media maxi mum 4 GB and loaded to restore the original set tings even if they have been modified It is a good idea to save favorite settings that you create As an example we will explain how to save the following data e Internal memory programs combinations global settings drum kits user arpeggio patterns e Songs cue lists patterns e Multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode If you wish to save the data on a floppy disk insert a floppy disk into the TRITON s floppy disk drive For details on floppy disk handling be sure to refer to Cautions for floppy disk handling
241. lay In this case the program of the timbre that matches the MIDI channel of the received message will change e If Bank Change is unchecked bank select messages will not be transmitted or received p 118 in the Parameter Guide MIDI Filter After touch Channel after touch Dn wv n channel vv value When you apply pressure to the keyboard after play ing a note an after touch effect will be applied and Channel After Touch messages will be transmitted When these messages are received an after touch effect will be applied e After touch for the entire instrument can be turned off in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Filter In Combination and Sequencer modes after touch can be switched on off independently for each timbre track P3 MIDI 1 tab Enable After Touch p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide MIDI Filter Polyphonic key pressure An kk vv n channel kk note number vv value There is another type of after touch called Polyphonic Key Pressure which allows after touch to be applied independently for individual keys This message can be used as an alternate modulation source but cannot be transmitted by the TRITON s keyboard In order to use this message it will have to be received from an external device or recorded on your sequencer The after touch mentioned in this manual refers to Channel After Touch Pitch bender Pitch bender change En bb mm n channel bb lower
242. lay mode Use Track Select to select the track that you wish to play from the keyboard If you select track 1 you will be able to play arpeggiator A If you select track 2 you will be able to play arpeggiator B If in this state you move to Global mode arpeggiator A track 1 will be played if the global MIDI channel is 01 or arpeggiator B track 2 will be played if the global MIDI channel is 02 When editing a user arpeggio pattern pay atten tion to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit A If you moved here from Sampling mode the arpeggiator will not turn on Nor will it be possible to edit arpeggio patterns About arpeggiator synchroniza tion The note timing of the arpeggiator will depend on the setting of its Key Sync check box If this is checked the arpeggiator will operate at the timing that you play the first note on after having released all notes If this is unchecked the arpeggiator will synchronize to the timing of the internal external MIDI clock The following paragraphs explain how synchroniza tion occurs when the Key Sync check box is not checked Arpeggiator and sequencer synchronization in Sequencer or Song Play mode When MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock is set to J EXT in Sequencer mode the arpeggiator will synchronize t
243. le tracks These patterns can be used as track musical data by being placed in a track page menu command Put to Track or copied to a track page menu command Copy to Track Alternatively you can use a pattern with the RPPR function of a song As track musical data of a song Phrases that are used repeatedly in a song can be recorded as patterns When you place Put to Track such a pattern ina song the musical data of that pattern will be recalled and played when playback reaches the measure in which the pattern was played When using a phrase or rhythm that occurs repeatedly you can make more effi cient use of memory by creating a pattern and placing it in multiple locations of the song rather than actually recording the same data directly to each location of the song However be aware that if you modify the pat tern itself the playback will be affected for all mea sures at which the pattern had been placed If you copy Copy to Track a pattern to a track of the song the playback data will be recorded on the track just as if you had recorded it onto the track in the first place This will occupy more memory than if you use Put to Track but you will be able to edit each loca tion of data independently without affecting other locations just as when editing normal track data The RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function For each song you can assign patterns to each note of the key
244. lly be recorded even if the RPPR performance consists of multiple tracks Of the patterns that are assigned by the RPPR settings only the performance of the patterns whose track matches will be recorded Press the START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which recording began Sampling mode The TRITON provides high performance mono stereo sampling A None of the multisample or sample data in Sam pling mode is backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it on a floppy disk or external SCSI device if the sep arately sold EXB SCSI option is installed before turning off the power Immediately after the power is turned on the TRI TON will contain no multisample or sample data If you wish to playback or edit data you must first load previously saved data from floppy disk or an external SCSI device Features of sampling mode 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono stereo sampling 16 Mbytes of sample waveform data memory is standard allowing you to sample for approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds in monaural or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds in stereo By installing 72 pin SIMM modules you can expand the memory to a maximum of 64 Mbytes which will allow you to record up to four 2 minute 54 second samples in mono or four 1 minute 27 second samples in stereo for a maximum total of approximately 11 minutes 39 seconds of sampling time For
245. locity switched combina tions The upper and lower limits of the velocity zone of each timbre are determined by the Top Velocity and Bot tom Velocity respectively The following diagram shows an example of a velocity switched combination in velocity will switch between timbres 1 and 2 to play different programs Such combinations are created by setting the velocity zone Timbre 1 Brass EA Timbre 2 Strings 53 A M To create a combination such as shown above first use P0 Play or P1 Edit program Mixer to select the program that each timbre 1 and 2 will use vey switch 1 Select a brass program for timbre 1 Select a strings program for timbre 2 In P2 Edit Trk Param select the MIDI Channel tab Set each timbre you are using to a Status of INT and a MIDI Channel of Gch or the global MIDI channel G will be displayed after the channel number In P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Vel Zone tab set the Top Velocity and Bottom Velocity Set timbre 1 to a Top Velocity of 127 and a Bot tom Velocity of 64 Set timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63 and a Bottom Velocity of 1 You can also input the value by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctr1 Yel Zone EEk paa ALOLULILLELLULLELLUPLLELLLELLOLLLELLELLLOLLELLUULLELLLELLOLLLOLLOLLLULLOLE Bank C 9
246. lso use it to modify pro gram numbers or insert control changes Create Control Data is a function that lets you create and insert controller data that changes smoothly between two specified values over the specified length of time This is used to input bend after touch and control change data etc 63 Basic functions Sequencer mode Realtime recording on a track Preparations for recording Before you begin recording you need to make track settings amp Be sure to turn off the Global mode protect setting p 37 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 638 MERA Song No 001 01 000 Meter 474 J 120 P Manu and name gt RYT RMN AR e Track Select Tt Chai RPPR Nofissian mcategory f EC Category Pz Patsu ank Prograi i D n000 D nooo nooo nagg i nooo D no0o D 000 Bank Program In Sequencer mode select P0 Play REC and select the Program T01 08 tab or Program T09 16 tab Press Song No and name and select the song that you wish to record Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the song number and press the ENTER key If you press the popup button you can select from the popup menu If you select a song number that has not yet been recorded the Create New Song dialog box will appear Press the OK button To set the song name use the page menu command Rename Song p 38 Assigning a name Rename Use Track Select to select the
247. lue This slider can also be used as a modulation source AI V keys These are used to increase or decrease the parame ter value in steps of one It is convenient to use these to make fine adjustments VALUE dial Use this dial to modify the value of the parameter 11 Numeric keys 0 9 ENTER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these keys to numerically input a parameter value Use numeric keys 0 9 the key and the 10 s HOLD key to enter the value and press the ENTER key to confirm it The 10 s HOLD key lets you input a value with a decimal point The key inverts the sign of the parameter value The 10 s HOLD key is also used when you wish to hold the 10 s place while selecting programs or combinations By holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can select up to ten page menu commands in the current page LCD screen The TRITON features a Touch View system that uses a touch panel LCD screen By pressing objects that are shown in the LCD screen you can select pages tabs and parameters and set values p 10 12 EXIT key When in P page 1 9 of each mode pressing the EXIT key will move to P page 0 of that mode When a dialog box is open this key will cancel the settings made in the dialog box and close the dia log box corresponds to the Cancel button If a popup menu or page menu is open pressing EXIT will close
248. m Pref tab to GM 2 Press the S PLAY key to enter Song Play mode Insert a floppy disk containing SMF data into the TRITON s disk drive When the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed If you wish to load data from external SCSI media such as a hard disk refer to the EXB SCSI owner s manual and make sure that the exter nal SCSI drive etc is connected Also make sure that the media contains SMF data Press either the LOCATE START STOP or PAUSE key Data will be loaded from the media If you press the START STOP key the data will be loaded and playback will begin the same as in step File Select will show the SMF filenames SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 Aa 001 01 00O Meter 1 4 J 14 _ Jukebox File Select File gt E Neme SONG a1 GGG1 Acoustic Pi If there is no SMF data in the floppy disk or if there is no SMF data in the currently selected directory no filename will be displayed as shown below SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 63 MEKA O1 OOO Meter s J 120 _ Jukebox Name S081 Acoustic Piano If no jukebox list has been enai no o tl names will be displayed if the Jukebox check box is checked Uncheck the Jukebox check box To move to a directory that contains SMF data press the MENU key and then press P3 Select Direc tory to display P3 Select Directory
249. m tab when you select a song or when you return to the beginning of a measure p 30 47 in the Parameter Guide Bank Program MIDI e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track P3 MIDI Filter and MIDI 1 tab Enable Program Change p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide Selecting combinations You can use program change and bank select messages to select combinations in the same way that you select programs e Combinations 000 127 in banks A B C and D correspond to program changes Cn 00 Cn 7F e Similarly as for program banks the internal banks that correspond to each bank select number will depend on the Bank Map setting Global PO Preference tab Bank Map on p 115 in the Parameter Guide e In Combination P0 Play program change and bank select messages are transmitted received on the global MIDI channel They are not received in P1 Edit Program Mixer P9 Edit Master Effect fs All program changes can be turned off in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Filter As needed you can independently turn all program changes on off specify whether or not incoming mes sages will be able to change combinations and turn reception transmission of bank select messages on off e If Combination Change is unchecked the combination will not change even if a program change on the global MIDI channel is received in Combination P0 P
250. mediately before the sound is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks Move the slider for each band to make adjustments 108 You can select the Master EQ tab and adjust the band frequency of the master EQ p 207 in the Parameter Guide Effect settings in Combination Song and Song Play modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can specify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effects and master effects These settings are made in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing In Combination P8 Edit Insert Effect select the Routing tab COMBINATION P8 Edit Insert FX Routing yd Peet Stereo Compressor fak St Graphic 7EQ On Stereo Flanger On 5 Rd Stereo Phaser Jon St BPM Delay On Select IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Here you can specify the bus insert effect to which the output of each timbre will be sent nofe The routing insert effects and chain settings are shown graphically in the upper part of the display screen In this example T01 timbre 1 uses IFX1 and 2 T02 uses IFX2 T03 uses IFX3 and 4 T02 and T05 use IFX4 and T06 and T07 use IFX5 Selection of each effect type the on off setting and chain settings are made in the Insert Effect tab Make settings for Send 1 and Send 2 For each timbre you can set the send levels to the master effects This ca
251. menu com mand The jukebox list will be loaded into the TRITON 88 Playing along with SMF data Minus one play You can enjoy minus one play by playing back SMF data muting a specific part and playing that part yourself Playback the SMF data identify the track whose part you wish to play and stop playback p 86 In P0 Prog Mix select the Prog 1 8 tab or Prog 9 16 tab Use Play Track Select to select the track for the part that you want to play from the keyboard When you play the keyboard the program of the selected track will be heard SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 63 MEKA 001 01 000 Meter 1 4 J 147 Jukebox Name SONG 001 GGG1 Acoustic Piano a F cn Pestoad Bank Program Bei peel sapje seo1 D caat D 59 Press the PLAY MUTE button to set the track selected in step to MUTE If you want the musical data of the track to playback in addition to your own playing on the keyboard set Play Mute to PLAY Press the START STOP key to begin playback and play along on the keyboard with the song Arpeggiator During minus one play you can use the arpeggiator for your keyboard performance p 98 p 107 in the Parameter Guide Global mode In Global mode you can make settings that affect the entire TRITON such as user scales category names drum kits and user arpeggio patterns This chapter will describe the procedure f
252. meter Guide Multisamples A multisample consists of settings that make one or more samples sound in different areas of the keyboard A multisample consist of between one and 128 indexes Each index contains parameters that specify the sample that will playback the zone for which it will playback the original pitch key the playback pitch and level etc Using multisamples When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a wide range of pitches such as a piano recording just one sample and using it playing it back over the entire pitch range will not produce a natural sounding result By using a multisample and assigning a sepa rately recorded sample to each portion of the pitch range you can produce a more natural sound For example you might record one sample per octave and assign each of these samples to an index keyboard area All of the instrumental sounds in the TRITON s internal preset ROM multisamples are constructed in this way You can use a multisample to arrange multiple phrase samples or rhythm loops across the keyboard and play two or more samples simultaneously Since a different phrase could be assigned to each key you can perform just as though you were using a pad type sampler Alternatively these samples could be assigned at one octave intervals and played as phrase variations with different playback pitches The TRITON can hold a maximum of 1 000 multisam ples in its internal memory A
253. mm Weight TRITONproX 28 6 kg TRITON pro 16 5 kg TRITON 14 2 kg Power consumption 26 W Included items AC cable Preloaded program disks TNFD 00P TNFD 01P 136 7 42 dBu LEVEL knob max Options Expansion boards EXB MOSS DSP Synthesizer Board EXB SCSI SCSI Interface Board EXB PCM01 PCM Expansion Board Pianos Classic Keyboards EXB PCM02 PCM Expansion Board Studio Essential Expression volume pedal XVP 10 Foot controller EXP 2 Damper pedal DS 1H Pedal switch PS 1 Connection kit AG 001B MIDI Driver software and computer inter face cable for IBM PC compatible AG 002B MIDI Driver software and computer inter face cable for Macintosh for models a serial port is equipped Other MIDI cable Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice April 99 TRITON prox TRITON pro TRITON Default Changed Basic Channel 62 notes Music Workstation Sampler MIDI Implementation Chart l 16 1 16 Recognized Date 1999 04 12 Remarks Memorized Memorized Messages Altered Mode Note Number True Voice 00000000000000 x 0 127 ooooooo oo000 0 127 O 127 Sequencer and Arpeggiator data can transmit all note numbers 0 127 Note On Note Off Velocity 9n V 1 127 x 9n V 1 127 x Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Monophonic Channel oe
254. modified data into internal memory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program number or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing the data of the newly selected program or combination will be called into the edit buffer and your changes will be lost he When you press the front panel COMPARE key in the edit pages P1 P9 of Program mode or Com bination mode the data from memory i e the contents that were written into memory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer k Edit Edit Buffer When you Write the program or When you select a program or combination settings will be Write Select combination its data is called from internal memory into the edit buffer Internal Memory Program Combination BankA 0 127 BankA 0 127 saved in internal memory Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns The settings you edit in Global mode can be written into internal memory This is done using the operations Write Global Setting Write Drum Kits and Write Arpeggio Patterns If you wish to use these settin
255. mple in Sample Select that you wish to record refer to Manual sampling step Specify the Sample Mode refer to Manual sampling step Press the REC WRITE key Press the START STOP key When the input signal exceeds the Threshold level sampling will begin automatically Sampling will stop when you press the START STOP key once again A Sampling will end automatically if the remaining amount of memory reaches zero Play the C2 note on the keyboard and you will hear the sound that you sampled Creating multisample indexes and sampling SAMPLING P Recording Recording aaa Ms 998 News aga Index 001 _ 881 Index ae eyboar naex oo MELA ETNA vos Sine P 2999 NewSample_aaaa OrigKey C2 _ TopKey B2 _ Range C 1 B2 Create Create button REC Sample Setup RAM Bank P RAM1 Sample Time 21 636 sec Sample Mode D L Mono Record Input Prefe Memory Nine Nieta Mrenea eee oo Here s how to create indexes for a multisample and assign a sample to each index If desired you can first create several indexes for a multisample and then record a sample for each index In P0 Recording select the Recording tab Select the MS multisample refer to Manual sampling step Press the Create button to create an index Immediately after the power is turned on the Index will be indicated as 0
256. n Front and rear panel 17 VELOCITY knob This adjusts the velocity playing strength of the arpeggio notes At the center position 12 o clock the velocity will be the same as the Velocity parameter of the arpeggiator Rotating the knob toward the left will weaken the velocity and rotat ing it toward the right will strengthen the velocity ON OFF switch This switches the Arpeggiator function on off When on the LED will light BANK keys These keys are used to switch Program Combina tion banks PROG BANK SMP AS Ch D E MCMmcacacacs COMB BANK PROG BANK A B C D E F G When selecting programs use keys A B C D E F available when the EXB MOSS is installed and G The LED of the selected bank will light Each time you press G you will cycle through the GM 2 variation banks and the drum bank as follows G g 1 2 g 8 9 g d G ete COMBI BANK A B C D When selecting combinations use keys A B C and D The LED of the selected bank will light In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes when the edit cell highlighted area is located at the program of a timbre or track you can use the BANK keys to select the bank of the program The bank LED of the program selected for that timbre track will light Rear panel AC power supply connector Connect the included power supply cable here A
257. n Normally you will check this The settings of each parameter will be valid If this is unchecked drum sample parameters will not be assigned to that key Playing that key will sound the settings of the key to its right at a pitch one semitone lower Use this when you wish to play a tom or cymbal with the same settings but with a different pitch Velocity Sample SW Lo Hi You can specify different drumsamples for High Drumsample and Low Drumsample and use velocity keyboard playing dynamics to switch the drumsam ple that will sound This is referred to as velocity drumsample switching ss This function is similar to the velocity multisample switching of a program p 46 About High Low amp If you are not using this function set the Velocity Sample SW Lo gt Hi value to 001 When you play only the High Drumsample will sound Bank ROM Select drumsamples from the TRITON s inter nal ROM memory RAM Select samples that were sampled in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode EXB Select dr umsamples from a separately sold EXB PCM series option board amp Some EXB PCM series boards do not contain drumsamples About ROM drumsamples The TRITON contains 413 drumsamples in its internal ROM memory When you press the popup button the ROM drum samples will be displayed in 15 different categories You can use the tabs located at the left and right to select a category and choose drumsamples from
258. n we will explain how to load an RPPR demo song and play it As described in steps of Listening to a demo song p 18 load PRELOAD SNG and PRE LOAD PCG Press the SEQ to enter Sequencer mode Press the MENU key to access the page list Either press the P0 Play REC area or press numeric key 0 The PO Play REC page will appear Press the Song No and name area in the display The song name will be highlighted Use the numeric key 3 and press the ENTER key S003 FEVER will be selected ES You can also select a song from the popup menu SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 135 ph auto S003 FEVER Bank Program oj D se0e gt eess gt ark R amp E Gospel 0 Dolphin Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked Checked The specified RPPR set in Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup will function Unchecked RPPR will not function Operation will be as in normal Sequencer mode Press a key The pattern assigned to that key will playback In some cases the pattern will continue playing after you release your hand from the keyboard You can stop playback either by pressing that key once again or by pressing a key in the area of C2 or below Shutdown Key When you play a key in the range of C 1 C2 the cur rently playing pattern will stop Pattern Assignable A pattern and track can
259. n Name Multisamples Sampling PO 4 Page Menu Com mand Rename MS Samples Sampling PO 4 Page Menu Com mand Rename Sample Drum kits Global Page Menu Command P5 Rename Drum Kit User arpeggio patterns Global Page Menu Command P6 Rename Arpeggio Pattern Global P4 Program Cat Combination categories Global P4 Combination Cat Program categories For details on the renaming procedure refer to Writ ing a program or combination 38 Writing a program or combination A program or combination that you create by editing its settings in the Performance Editor or in the various Edit pages can be saved in internal memory This pro cedure is called Program Write or Combination Write If you wish to use the edited settings again after turn ing the power off be sure to write the settings into memory There are two ways to write a program or combination Before you write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode Memory protect Using a page menu command to write Press the Write Program or Write Combination page menu command The Write Program Write Combination dialog box will appear You can also access the same dialog box by holding down the ENTER key and pressing the 0 key The screen shown is for Program mode Write Program ABOA T Noisy Stabber Category P 19 FastSynth To Program D AO
260. n Select 4004 Yocoderhythm 14012 Bell Amis In the above graphic bank A is selected The center area shows the combinations contained in that bank Press the tabs located at the left to select banks Press combination names in the center area to select combinations The selected combination will be highlighted When you are satisfied with the selected combina tion press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the combination that had been selected when you opened the popup menu 23 Quick Start Selecting and playing a combination Selecting combinations from Category Combina tion Select You can select combinations from a list organized by category With the factory settings the combinations are classified into sixteen categories of instrument keyboard organ bass drums etc Here the combina tions are divided into sixteen categories Press the Category popup button A tabbed Category Combination Select popup menu will appear Category Combination Select 00 Keyb In the graphic category 00 Keyboard is selected The central area shows the combinations contained in that category Press the tabs located at the left and right to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the upper right Press a c
261. n be set only if IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to L R or Off kh The actual send level is determined by multiplying this by the Send 1 or Send 2 settings for oscil lators 1 and 2 within the program selected by the timbre If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is set to 0 the resulting level will still be 0 even if you raise this send level If IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert FX tab following the insert effects Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the signal that has passed through each insertion effect If effects are chained the settings after the last IFX in the chain will be used Send 1 and Send 2 adjust the amount of master effect that is applied to the signal that has passed through the IFX These settings can be made in the same way as for a program p 107 COMBINATION P8 Edit Insert FX Insert Fx aa Bank OGG Combination AGAGA Chain Insert Effect IFX1 D GG2 Stereo Compresso IFX2 cond Ol D 998 St Graphic 7EQ 126 G64 PanCC 8 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 IFX3 if i e7 920 stereo Flanger ee i i gt IFx4 eA D 023 Stereo Phaser hed 964 G00 IFXS 859 5t_ BPM Delay oaa CCRC Master effects Master EQ These settings
262. n edited program into internal memory be sure to Write the program p 38 amp If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed you will be able to use the special bank F The parameter structure of bank F programs is dif ferent than that of the other banks Refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual The Compare function When P1 P9 are displayed you can press the COM PARE to make the LED light This will recall the sound that had been written before you started editing Press the COMPARE key once again and the LED will go dark and you will return to the sound that you had been editing Use this function when you wish to com pare the unedited sound with the results of your edit ing amp When the COMPARE key LED is lit editing a parameter will make the LED go dark and that sound will now be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key LED is dark P1 Edit Basic Oscillator settings In P1 Edit Basic you can make oscillator related set tings The TRITON provides two oscillators and for each oscillator you can select a basic waveform mul tisample and set the pitch The multisamples pro vided by the TRITON include waveforms for musical instruments such as pianos as well as special wave forms unique to synthesizers Multisamples reproduce the complex overtone structure and frequency charac teristics that allow us to identify a sound as being piano like or guitar like Program Basic tab
263. n the power is turned on the EXB PCM 1 EXB1 type of installed options will be ar tee x22 displayed After installing an Semi 3210 option be sure to check this dis play to verify that the option was installed correctly If the option is not displayed here even though it was installed it was not installed correctly Turn off the power and re install the option For details on installing an option refer to p 237 in the Parameter Guide EXB MOSS The EXB MOSS option is installed EXB SCSI The EXB SCSI option is installed EXB PCM Slot1 A PCM expansion board is installed in EXB PCM series slot 1 The type of board is shown in parentheses EXB PCM Slot2 A PCM expansion board is installed in EXB PCM series slot 2 The type of board is shown in parentheses SIMM Slot1 MB A SIMM is installed in SIMM slot 1 The capacity of the SIMM is shown in parentheses When the TRITON is shipped from the factory a 16 MB SIMM is already installed in this slot SIMM Slot2 MB A SIMM is installed in SIMM slot 2 The capacity of the SIMM is shown in parentheses 17 Quick Start Turning the power on off Listening to a demo song Here s how to listen to a demo song on the TRITON Contents of the disks The TRITON series comes with two floppy disks TNFD 00P and TNFD 01P PRELOAD PCG e Preloaded data programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns global settings e Program data progr
264. n to input a name p 38 Use the check boxes to uncheck items that you do not wish to save In order to accurately reproduce the data you cre ated we recommend that you leave all check boxes checked Press the OK button The data will be saved on the specified media and you will return to the Save page The amount of time required will depend on the amount of data If a file with the same name already exists on the floppy disk you will be asked whether you want to Overwrite If you wish to overwriting press the OK button If you wish to save without overwriting press the Cancel button re do the operation from step and rename the data in step before saving it The LCD screen will show the files that were saved The data will be saved as the following files e NEWFILE PCG 96 999 12 00 00 NEWFILE SNG 9K 61 03 1999 12 00 00 NEWFILE KSC 40 01 03 1999 12 00 00 NEWFILE 01 03 1999 12 00 00 PCG file Programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings that were saved in internal memory SNG file Sequencer songs cue lists and user patterns KSC file A file which lists the multisamples and samples used Directory A directory containing the multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files that are listed in the KSC file Other ways to save In addition to Save All the page menu commands include Save PCG which saves programs combina
265. n use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on In Global P6 User Arpeggio select the Pattern Setup tab GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Arpeggiator eS Pattern Setup EEk Sort Key Syne Latch _ Keyboard peggio Pattern Set Arpeggio Tone Mode Normal Fixed Note Arpeggio Type D gt As Played Octave Motion Dd Up If you moved here from Program mode A will automatically be selected for Arpeggiator Select In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select an empty user arpeggio pattern If you have moved from Program mode the arpeg gio pattern selected by the program will be dis played he If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard will not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeg gio patterns P000 P004 can be selected they can not be edited he When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will have an effect anytime that this pat tern is used in Program Combination Sequencer or Song Play mode In Length specify the length of the pattern After the pattern has played for the length specified here at the note interval specified by Resolution it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this example set it to 8 EJ For the preset arpeggio patterns U000 A B U199 A B simply changing the Length can sig nificantly change the character
266. ncluding event editing and many other edit commands When the Status of a track is set to INT or BTH an external sequencer can be used to play the TRITON as a multi timbral tone generator When the Status of a track is set to BTH EXT or EXT2 the sequencer of the TRITON can play exter nal tone generators Playback can be synchronized with an external MIDI device The TRITON s AMS Alternate Modulation capability lets you use control changes for realtime control of the parameters of the programs used in a program Its MIDI Sync functionality lets you synchronize the LFO speed to changes in the tempo Dmod Dynamic Modulation functionality lets you control effect parameters in realtime You can also use MIDI Sync to synchronize the LFO speed or delay time to changes in the tempo You can assign names not only to the song but also to each pattern and track Combination settings can be copied to a song Sequencer data such as a song or cue list that you create can be saved in the TRITON s native format or transmitted as a MIDI data dump Programs or sample files can be linked and saved on external media This data can be loaded when desired A song you created can be converted into SMF Standard MIDI File data and saved on external media SMF songs can also be loaded The PLAY MUTE REC buttons and SOLO buttons let you instantly play mute any desired track You can rewind or fast forward while listening to
267. ng P9 Master Effect Select and make settings for the master effects Master EQ settings he If the separately sold EXB MOSS is installed the special bank F can be used in Song Play mode as well For details on the bank F parameters refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual he The parameter settings of Song Play mode are not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to save the program track parameter and effect settings of the song use the page menu com mand Save Template Song to save them If you wish to play SMF song data you must first load it from external media such as a floppy disk The structure of Song Play mode As shown in the diagram below Song Play mode con sists of tracks 1 16 effects and arpeggiator About SMF SMF data in format 0 or format 1 can be played back in Song Play mode The TRITON recognizes only files with an extension of MID as SMF data Be sure that the filename extension is MID About MIDI Track status settings in Song Play mode You can select whether the musical data played by a track or the data produced by operating the TRITON s keyboard and controllers will sound the TRITON s internal tone generator and or will sound an external tone generator When the Status of a track is set to INT the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON will play and control the TRITON s internal
268. nge Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global mode P1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External MIDI or PCI F 2 LSB MSB 02 00 Arpeggiator ON OFF 0A 00 Arpeggiator Gate control 0B 00 Arpeggiator Velocity control 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune Appendices MIDI Implementation Chart and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION 137 Index Numerics 10 s Hold Combination 23 Program 21 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter 48 24 dB oct low pass filter with reso nance 48 A After Touch 27 115 After Touch Curve 126 Lock function 26 Vibrato effect 47 Wah effect 49 Alternate Modulation 51 Amp 44 Amp EG 49 50 AMS Alternate Modulation Source 51 Append 19 Arpeggiator 29 Assign 99 Link Combination 32 100 Link Program 31 98 Octave 97 on off 29 96 98 120 Synchronization 105 Tempo 29 96 Velocity 120 Arpeggio Gate 30 97 102 Key Sync 31 97 Keyboard 31 97 Latch 30 32 Octave 30 97 Pitch Offset 102 Resolution 30 97 Sort 30 97 Swing 97 Velocity 30 97 102 Assigning a name 38
269. ngs Synchronizing the playback of the arpeggiator or sequencer The choice of whether the TRITON will be the master the controlling device or the slave the controlled device is made by Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock Using the TRITON as master and the external MIDI device as slave Connect the TRITON s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI device Alter natively connect the TRITON s TO HOST connector to your computer p 111 112 e When you set MIDI Clock to Internal the TRITON will be the master device and will transmit MIDI timing clock messages Arpeggiator The tempo can be controlled from the TRITON Simultaneously the performance of the arpeggiator will be transmitted via MIDI In Com bination Sequencer and Song Play modes data will be transmitted by timbres tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 An external tone generator con nected to MIDI OUT will sound and the tempo of an external sequencer can be controlled Sequencer The musical data can be played back and controlled on the TRITON Simultaneously the sequencer playback will be transmitted via MIDI from tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 An external tone generator connected to MIDI OUT will sound and the tempo of an external sequencer can be controlled However since exclusive data cannot be recorded on the TRITON s sequencer you can use the Global 122 P1 MIDI Dump Sequencer
270. o edit RPN Registered Parameter Number is a type of mes sage that allows settings to be made in a way that is common between instrument manufacturers NRPN Non registered Parameter Numbers and exclusive messages can be freely used in non compatible ways by different manufacturers and models of instrument RPN messages can be used for editing with the follow ing procedure Use RPN MSB CC 101 Bn 65 mm and RPN LSB CC 100 Bn 64 rr n channel mm rr upper and lower bytes of the parameter number messages to select the parameter Use data entry MSB CC 6 Bn 06 mm and data entry LSB CC 38 Bn 26 vv n channel mm vv upper and lower bytes of the value together expressing 16 384 levels to specify the value You can use data increment CC 96 Bn 60 00 or data decrement CC 97 Bn 61 00 n channel value is fixed at 00 to change the value in steps of one The TRITON can receive the following three RPN mes sages tuning transpose and pitch bend range Tuning RPN fine tune Bn 65 00 64 01 This RPN message can be used to adjust the detuning for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Sequencer or Song Play modes The procedure is as follows Bn 65 00 64 01 Select RPN parameter 01 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 0 mm vv 00 00 is 100 cents and 16383 mm vv 7F 7F is
271. o the external MIDI sequencer etc connected via a MIDI cable In Song Play mode it is not possible to synchronize to an external MIDI clock When the song is stopped e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J based on the timing of the internal external MIDI clock e When a Sequencer mode RPPR pattern is playing the arpeggiator will synchronize to the based on that timing When the song is playing or recording e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J based on the timing of the song e In Sequencer mode when the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on and you press a note during the pre count before recording to start up the arpeggiator the arpeggiator will start from the beginning of the pattern simultaneously with the start of recording and will be recorded Synchronization with song start e When the arpeggiator is on ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is set to on and is running an incoming Song Start message will cause the arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pattern Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program or Combination mode When MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock is set to J EXT in Program or Combination modes the arpeggiator will synchronize to MIDI Clock or Start messages etc received from an external MIDI sequencer etc connected via a MIDI cable Synchronization with external MIDI clock e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J based on the timing
272. ocoder that combines the internal sounds with the sound from an external microphone Routing In modes other than Sampling mode i e in Combina tion Program Sequencer and Song Play modes the settings in Global P0 Basic Setup Audio Input tab specify the routing of the external audio input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks Move from Program mode to Global mode amp h If you move from Sampling mode to Global mode the Audio Input settings of Sampling mode will be maintained and you will not be able to hear the results of the settings you make in this page Be sure to move from a mode in which the external audio signal can be input Combination Program Sequencer Song Play In Sampling mode the set tings you make here will not apply Settings for the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks in Sam pling mode are made in the same way in Sampling PO Recording Input Setup tab Audio Input SAMPLING In Global P0 Basic Setup select the Audio Input tab GLOBAL P Basic Setup Audio Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY Input Level 127_ BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt MEE Pan Laaa Send1 to MFX1 000 i i Send2 to MFX2 000 Audio Input EE A Input2 Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Pan R127 Send1 to MFX1 000 i Send2 to MFX2 808 Set the parameters for Input 1 and 2 Input 1 corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and INPUT 2 jack corresponds to AUDIO INPUT 2 Lev
273. of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 6656 mm vv 34 00 is 12 semitones and 9728 mm vv 4C 00 is 12 semi tones When this is received the Global PO Basic tab Trans pose parameter will be set Transmitting sound settings data Data Dump Data for programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns global settings and sequencer data can be transmitted as MIDI exclusive messages The operation of sending this system exclusive data to an external device is called a data dump By performing a data dump you can store the TRI TON s sounds and settings on an external device or rewrite the sounds and settings of another TRITON series instrument There are the following three types of data dump e When you use the Global P1 MIDI Data Dump page menu command to dump data various types of internal memory data will be transmitted If this data is received by the TRITON the data will be written directly into internal memory and it will not be necessary to perform the Write operation Transmission Reception on pages 119 and 120 in the Parameter Guide e Ifthe Global P1 MIDI Enable Exclusive setting is checked selecting a combination in Combination PO Play will transmit data for one combination Selecting a program in Program Play P0 Play will transmit data for one program This data is the edit buffer data for the currently selected combination or program If this data is re
274. of the external MIDI clock Synchronization with song start e Ifthe arpeggiator is on and running receiving a song start will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of the pattern Synchronizing arpeggiators A and B In Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes the two arpeggiators can be operated simultaneously At this time if one arpeggiator is running and the other arpeggiator whose Key Sync is not checked is started the second arpeggiator will synchronize to the J based on the timing of the first arpeggiator E If Key Sync is checked arpeggiators A and B will operate with independent timing 105 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings Effects settings The effect section of the TRITON provides five insert effects two master effects one master EQ stereo 3 band EQ and a mixer that controls the routing of these components You can choose from 102 types of full digital effects for each insert effect and from 89 types for each master effect The effects are categorized as follows Categories of the 102 effect types 001 015 Filter and dynamics effects such as EQ and com pressor 016 031 Phase modulation effects such as chorus and phaser 032 040 Other modulation and pitch shift effects such as rotary speaker and pitch shifter 041 051 Early reflection and delay effects 052 057 Reverb effects 058 089 Mono mono chain effects that internally conn
275. of the pattern Try changing the length and listening to the result Make settings for the j Octave Resolution Sort Latch KeySync and Keyboard parameters These are program parameters but can be set from here as well If after moving here from Program mode you mod ify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example make the settings shown in the illustration In Arpeggio Pattern Setup make settings to spec ify how the arpeggio will be played These settings can be changed during or after edit ing p 127 in the Parameter Guide Select the Pattern Edit tab GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit Velocity G64 Flam 00 Pattern Pattern hk Setup Edit A pattern consists of Steps and Tones Step A user arpeggio pattern can have a maximum of 48 steps The arpeggiator will play from the first step at intervals of the note value specified by Resolution The vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the steps Use Step No to select the step For each step specify Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam Tone At each step a chord consisting of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 can be sounded To input tones select Step No and then u
276. off the power p 38 Performance Edit Press the PROG key to enter Program mode Press the Performance Edit tab PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit X i Type of Insert effect Functions assigned to SW1 and SW2 keys Type of Master effect X3 88B No Effect xd BBB No Effect 88 Performance editor Octave Pitch OSC Amp Attack Decay IFX MFX Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance hee Wisse J Parameters assigned to B mode of the realtime editor By using the eight sliders of the Performance Editor you can make overall adjustments to the sound When you move a slider multiple program parame ters are adjusted simultaneously he Depending on the settings of the program parame ters the result may not be noticeable Octave Adjust the octave Pitch Stretch Simultaneously adjust the transpose and tune settings of the oscillator This allows you to produce a variety of tonal changes without losing the character of the original sound he This Performance Edit function cannot be used on bank F 34 OSC Balance Adjust the level balance between oscillators 1 and 2 For programs whose Oscillator Mode Program P1 Program Basic tab setting is Single oscillator 2 will not sound Only the level of oscillator 1 will change For a Drums program this performance editor will have no effect Amp Level Adjust the amp level This will adjust the volume of the entire p
277. ogram parameter Gate Program P7 Arpeg Setup tab GATE SR KI CQ E The knob setting is saved when you write the pro gram E Itis effective to control this in conjunction with the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode knob 4 EG RELEASE Adjusting the strength of the arpeggio notes Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob to adjust the strength of the arpeggio notes Rotating the knob toward the left will make the notes weaker and rotating the knob toward the right will make the notes stronger At the center position 12 o clock the veloc ity will be as specified by the program parameter Velocity Program P7 Arpeg Setup tab VELOCITY SA 0 nO EE The knob setting is saved when you write the pro gram EE It is effective to control this in conjunction with the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode knobs 1 3 LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPE and EG INTENSITY Settings in the LCD screen In Program P0 Play press the Arpeggio tab PROGRAM P Play Arpeggio aa B Category J ank A D 10 FastSunth E000 Noisy Stabber peee AE POG GIACOL rennin t 00764 B 2 tone Vel Trip2 i Sort Key Sync oO Latch 0 Keyboard Selecting an arpeggio pattern An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset arpeg gio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 231 With the factory settings U000 199 contain a wide variety of preset user arpeggio patterns For the arpeggio pattern names refer to the separate
278. ombination name in the central area to select a combination The selected combination will be highlighted Press the scroll bar to move to additional pages of combinations in the selected category ED If you wish to change a combination to a different category you can set in the dialog box when writ ing the combination p 39 Category names can be changed in Category Name Global P4 When you are satisfied with the selected combina tion press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the combination that had been selected when you opened the popup menu 24 Other ways to select a combination Using a connected switch to select combinations p 1 25 An separately sold on off type foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 can be connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and used to select combinations Selecting combinations from a MIDI device p 11 4 MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by the TRI TON to select combinations Combination banks of the TRITON The TRITON contains combination banks A D Each bank contains 128 combinations numbered 000 127 for a total of 512 combinations With the factory settings these banks contain a variety of preset combinations that use programs effects and arpeggio patterns te For the preset combination banks and
279. ong as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instru ment can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant until note is released Volume Volume decays gradually Time Time Amp Lvl Pan tab PROGRAM P4 Edit Amp Amp Level sam Amp Level coed ams p off oO Use DKit Setting Amp1 Level Pan i Intensity 00 Amp Level Adjust the volume of the sound that has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Pan Adjust the pan stereo position of the sound that has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Nor mally this will be set to C064 If OSC Mode is Dou ble and you wish to produce a sense of stereo you can use this setting to place oscillators 1 and 2 at the left and right With a setting of Random the sound will be placed at a random location each time you play a note producing an interesting effect AMS Intensity AMS Intensity specifies the depth of the panning effect that will occur when AMS is operated When AMS is set to Note Number the pan will change according to the location you play on the key board With a setting of LFO1 or 2 the pan will sweep from side to side auto pan Other settings allow you to move the oscillator pan by operating a controller
280. ons advice and MIDI related explanations Example screen displays The values of the parameters shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory pur poses and may not necessary match the values that appear in the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers Data handling Malfunctions due to incorrect operation may cause the contents of memory to be lost so we recommend that you save important data on a floppy disk Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any damages which may result from loss of data Also when digitally recording copyrighted audio material from a DAT or CD etc you must obtain per mission for use Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any copyright violations which may occur through your use of this product Company names product names and names of for mats etc are the trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners Table of Contents About this manual 0000 cece eee iii Data handling sesira tar seers cee oe ch eee iii Introduction 1 Introducing the TRITON 608 1 Mainfeatures een aana cert N 2 1 Overview of the modes 000ee cues 3 Front and rear panel 20005 5 Front panel s
281. ontrol Bn 63 00 Bn 62 OB Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you operate the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob and the arpeggia tor velocity will change When this message is received the result will be the same 120 About system exclusive messages Since the way in which these messages are used is left up to each manufacturer they are mainly used to transmit and receive sound data and editing data for parameters that are unique to a particular instrument The TRITON s system exclusive message format is FO 42 3n 50 ff F7 FO exclusive status 42 Korg ID 3d n 0 F global MIDI channel 1 16 50 TRITON model ID ff function ID type of message F7 end of exclusive All models of the TRITON series use the same model ID Exclusive data can be exchanged between models of the TRITON series E To obtaina copy of the MIDI Implementation which includes MIDI exclusive format informa tion please contact your Korg distributor Universal system exclusive Certain of the system exclusive messages are publicly defined for a specific use and these are called univer sal system exclusive messages The TRITON uses the following six universal system exclusive messages Inquiry message request FO 7E nn 06 01 F7 Inquiry message FO 7E nn 06 02 nine bytes F7 When an inquiry message request is received the TRI TON will respond by transmitting an inquiry message that means I
282. oot switch CC 82 vv of 63 3F or less will be OFF and 64 3F or greater will be ON Damper pedal CC 64 Bn 40 vv This message is transmitted when you operate a damper pedal separately sold Korg DS 1H etc con nected to the DAMPER jack and the damper effect will be turned on off If the DS 1H is used a half damper effect can be applied e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI tab Enable Damper Sostenuto CC 66 Bn 42 wv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH operating the switch will transmit this message with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF and the sostenuto effect will be turned on off When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is oper ated OFF for vv 63 3F or below and ON for vv 64 40 or above Soft pedal CC 67 Bn 43 vv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH operating the switch will transmit this message with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF and the soft pedal effect will be turned on off When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is oper ated Controlling the tone envelope of a program CC 70 78 control specific parameters of a program For details on the program parameters that cor
283. or below the current directory use the Open button or Up button to display the file so that it can be selected he When you load a PCG file the data in the TRI TON s internal memory will be replaced by the data in that PCG file programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns global settings If you wish to keep the data that is currently in O 0O DOS directory Undefined DOS file Files that can be loaded DOS files PCG file i All programs 1 program bank H A F i mel HEILA All combinations 1 combination bank 1 combination A D i All drum kits 1 drum kit group IAB C D User Ep i 2 5 ha E EJ All user arpeggio 1 user arpeggio 1 user arpeggio ms pattern group A B C D pattern g m Global settings SNG file E 1 user pattern U00 99 internal memory use Save All or Save PCG to save it Press the page menu button and press the Load Selected page menu command Load selected A dialog box will appear The display and settings of the dialog box will depend on the type of file to be loaded For details on each type of file refer to p 132 in the Parameter Guide If Load SNG too is checked when you load the data the SNG file will also be loaded at the same time that the PCG file is loaded If Load KSC too is checked when you load the data the KSC file will also be loaded at t
284. or details on formatting refer to p 142 of the Parameter Guide E We recommend that you use 2HD floppy disks External SCSI storage media when the sepa rately sold EXB SCSI option is installed If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed the TRITON can save data on external SCSI media maxi mum 4 GB such as a hard disk Zip Jaz or MO drive When the EXB SCSI option is installed an external SCSI device of up to 4 GB can be formatted This format cannot be executed for media that is not 512 bytes block such as 640 MB MO disks etc 92 Loading data Types of data that can be loaded The various types of data that can be loaded from external media floppy disk etc are shown in the illus tration on the following page For details on each type of data refer to p 132 in the Parameter Guide If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed data can also be loaded from media such as a hard disk or CD ROM Data loading procedure Loading Programs Combinations Drum kits User arpeggio patterns and Global settings loading a PCG file As an example we will explain how to load a PCG file A PCG file contains programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings refer to the lower diagram on the following page You will select a PCG file for loading when you wish to re load a set of programs and combinations etc that you created and saved by the Save All or
285. or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Volume messages and the volume will change When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Expression CC 1 1 Bn OB vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Expression messages and the volume will change When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated The volume of the TRITON is determined by multiply ing the value of the Volume message with the value of the Expression message If adjusting the Volume message does not increase the volume as you expect or if there is no sound transmit MIDI messages from an external device to reset the value of the Expression message set vv to 127 In Sequencer mode this will be reset when the Loca tion of the song is moved to 001 01 000 e In Combination mode Volume messages will be transmitted by each timbre whose Status is EXT or EX2 when you re select the combination e When you change the Volume setting P0 Mixer tab in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode or when you re select the song or return to the beginning of the song in Sequencer mode volume messages will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 note Regardless of the
286. or editing a drum kit For the procedure of editing an user arpeg gio pattern refer to Arpeggiator settings p 96 For details on the parameters of other pages p 125 p 113 in the Parameter Guide he When you play the keyboard in Global mode the TRITON will sound as in the previous mode in which you were previously Be aware that if you moved from Sampling mode to Global mode ina state where the sampling memory contained no data such as immediately after the power is turned on playing the keyboard will not produce sound hs When you move from Sequencer or Song Play mode to Global mode playing the keyboard will sound the program or arpeggiator that corre sponds to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI page A The settings that you edit in Global mode are pre served as long as the power remains on but will be lost when the power is turned off The data han dled in Global mode can be classified into three types drum kit settings P5 user arpeggio pat tern settings P6 and all other global settings P0 P4 Each of these three types of data can be written into the memory area In Disk mode this data can also be saved on external media such as a floppy disk p 39 he Global mode does not provide a Compare function that lets you make before and after comparisons of your editing Before editing global settings drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you may wish to use Copy Drum Kit or Copy Arpeg
287. or your MO drive e If your MO drive does not have a mode setting or if the media exchange is not recognized even after you switch the mode use the drive select button to select a different drive and then re select the MO drive Parameter Guide PG Specifications and options Specifications System HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Modes Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play Global Disk Tone generator HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Polyphony 62 voices 62 oscillators in single mode 31 voices 62 oscillators in double mode Filters 24 dB oct LPF with resonance 12 dB oct LPF HPF Alternate modulation function Waveform memory 32 Mbyte PCM ROM 425 multisamples 413 drumsamples Expandable via PCM ROM option EXB PCM series is supported 16 Mbyte user sampling RAM SIMM expandable to a maximum of 64 Mbytes Sampling 48 kHz 16 bit linear Maximum sample data memory capacity 64 Mbyte with SIMM expansion 4000 samples 1000 multisamples 128 indexes for each multisample Able to load AIFF WAVE AKAI S1000 3000 Korg format sample data can be loaded Effect section 5 insert effects stereo in out 2 master effects mono in stereo out 1 master EQ 3 band stereo all usable simulta neously 102 effect types available for insert effects or master effects Effect dynamic modulation function Combinations Programs 512 user memory combinations 512 presets 640 user memory p
288. original templates that you create can be registered as user template songs Five stereo insertion effects two master effects and a stereo master EQ can be used for each song Sample waveforms that you sampled in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode can be converted into programs and used in a song If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed MOSS tone generator programs can be played multi timbrally For example you could use two bass voices and four electric piano voices However effect settings cannot be made separately Timing resolution is a maximum of J 192 58 Sixteen tracks are provided for musical data and a master track contains time signature and tempo data that controls the playback A track play loop function lets you loop specified measures independently for each track 150 preset patterns ideal for drum tracks are built in In addition you can create up to 100 user patterns for each song These patterns can be used as musical data within a song or can be played by the RPPR function Various methods of recording are supported including realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and controllers including MIDI control events is recorded just as you play and step recording in which the timing length and velocity of each note can be specify in the LCD as you input the pitches from the keyboard The musical data and control events that you recorded can be edited in various ways i
289. ource will be input to the TRITON At this time if audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks noise may be input to the TRITON via the AD converter even if no audio input is actually present and depend ing on the settings may be output from AUDIO OUTPUT L R 1 2 3 or 4 If you will not be using an external audio source but are using only the internal sounds of a program combination or song set BUS IFX Indiv Select to Off or set Level to 0 If no audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks the data that is input to the TRITON from the AD converter will be set to zero and no noise will be output About dynamic modulation Dmod p Dynamic modulation Dmod is a function that lets you use the TRITON s controllers or MIDI messages to control specific effect parameters while you play to make the effects change in realtime The BPM MIDI Sync function also lets you control effect parameters in a similar way This can be used to synchronize the LFO speed of a modulation type effect or the delay time of a delay type effect etc to the tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer For details on each of these functions refer to Appen dices Dynamic modulation p 214 in the Parameter Guide Setting example We will show how you can use dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime As described in the procedure for Effect settings
290. page menu command When you execute this command the settings of the currently selected multisample will be converted into a program In Program mode you can make filter amp and effect settings etc and play the sample as a program The resulting program can be used in a combination or song For details on the Convert MS To Program page menu command p 84 in the Parameter Guide Song Play mode In Song Play mode you can read Standard MIDI Files SMF directly from a floppy disk and play them If you simply want to play an SMF without editing it it will be convenient to select this mode The pages in Song Play mode For details on how to access these pages or modes refer to Basic operation of the TRITON p 12 PO Program Mix Play SMF data and make settings Specify the program pan and level for each track P1 Track Make MIDI and scale settings for each track If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed set related parame ters P2 Controller Setup Controller settings P3 Select Directory Jukebox Select the directory that contains the desired SMF and select the playback order of SMF files Create jukebox lists P4 P5 P6 P7 Arpeggiator settings P8 Insert Effect Select and make settings for insert effects Make settings for the routing insertion effects master effects and individual output assignments of each track in the so
291. performs the 10 s Hold function p 21 p 23 BANK keys The BANK keys are used in Program mode to select the program bank and in Combination mode to select the combination bank In Combination mode they are also used to select the program bank for each timbre of the combination In Sequencer and Song Play modes these keys are used to select the bank of the program used by each track of the song BANK key Program Bank A n Bank A Bank B ale Bank B Bank C as Bank C Bank D a Bank D Bank E Bank F Bank G Bank g 1 Bank g 2 Combination Bank g 9 128 Bank g d 001 128 l Banks A D are rewritable user program combina tion banks The factory settings and the preset pro grams combinations of the separately sold EXB PCM series options are provided for banks A D 2 Bank Eis also a rewritable user program bank like banks A D We recommend that you use bank E for programs that you yourself create When converting a multisample created in Sampling mode into a pro gram Convert MS to Program it is best to use bank E 3 Bank Fis available if the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed This bank is only for programs that use the EXB MOSS Banks G g 1 g 9 and g d comprise eleven banks They contain 256 programs compatible with GM2 and 9 drum programs These banks cannot be rewritten Each time you press the BANK G key you will cycle t
292. pleted songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song Repeat 01 000 Intro 02 Intro Intro A A A A 02 S010 A 04 B B B B Bridge Bridge 03 S011 B 04 04 S020 Bridge 02 A A A A A Solo oe 05 S010 A 04 06 S010 A Solo 01 As an example we will explain the procedure for creat ing individual songs for the introduction melody A bridge and ending and then using a cue list to bring these songs together to form a complete song Create separate songs for the introduction melody A bridge and ending S000 Intro 4 measures S001 A 8 measures S002 Bridge 8 measures S003 Ending 4 measures Record the songs When doing so first create the program settings track settings and effect settings for one song e g S000 and then use the PO page menu command Copy From Song to copy these settings to the other songs S001 S003 Diam et Te ee Pee Camere ae amp Keep the track settings unified as far as possible After the cue list is completed you can convert it into a song When this is done the track settings of each song program pan volume etc will be con verted into musical data and reproduced but unless the MIDI channel settings are the same the resulting song may not be the same as the cue list playback Select Sequencer mode P1 Cue List With the
293. programs contained in that bank Press the tabs located at the left and right to select banks Press program names in the center area to select programs The selected program will be highlighted When you are satisfied with the selected program y prog press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when you opened the popup menu 21 Quick Start Selecting and playing a program Selecting programs from Category Program Select You can select programs from a list organized by cate gory With the factory settings the programs are classi fied into sixteen categories of instrument keyboard organ bass drums etc Press the Category popup button A tabbed Category Program Select popup menu will appear 16 FastSynth Category Program Select A028 Rezbo B016 Future Syn Pad AG64 Ana Brass Lead B064 SynthBrass In the above graphic category 10 FastSynth is selected The center area shows the programs con tained in that category Press the tabs located at the left and right to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the upper right Press a program name in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted E If you wish to change a program to
294. r measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remainder of the playback will be correct Realtime recording an RPPR perfor mance Multitrack recording You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously record the performance of multiple tracks played by the RPPR function The pattern will be recorded as musical data on the track used by RPPR RPPR settings for recording are made in the P6 Pat tern RPPR tab RPPR Setup Here if you set Sync to SEQ the pattern playback will be recorded in synchro nization with the sequencer For details on how the Sync setting will affect the start timing of the pattern playback p 71 in the Parameter Guide With a setting of SEQ patterns played by the RPPR function while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer The pattern of a key pressed during the pre count before recording begins will start simultaneously with the beginning of recording and will be recorded When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timing of the recorded events may be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting Reso Realtime Quantize Resolution to a setting other than Hi Using the procedure described in Preparations for recording p 64 make the necessary set tings Your keyboar
295. r mode Send 1 2 will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 Send 1 2 Insert FX MIDI on p 76 and 110 in the Parameter Guide Effect 2 depth IFX1 5 on off CC 92 Bn 5C wv Effect 4 depth MFX1 on off CC 94 Bn 5E vv Effect 5 depth MFX2 on off CC 95 Bn 5F vv Separately from the effect on off settings in each mode Global P1 Basic Setup Effect Global SW allows you to turn off insert effects IFX1 5 and master effects MFX1 and MFX2 If you check IFX1 5 Off MEX1 Off or MFX2 Off the corresponding mes sage will be transmitted with vv 0 00 If you uncheck these settings the corresponding message will be transmitted with vv 127 7F If you check these set tings the corresponding effect s will be turned off as a group If you uncheck these settings the on off set tings of each mode will be used The same applies to reception vv of 00 is off and 01 or greater is the origi nal setting These messages are transmitted received on the global MIDI channel ON OFF MIDI on p 26 and 27 in the Parameter Guide E These messages are defined simply for use in adjusting the effect levels and may not have the same function on another instrument connected to the TRITON Using various controllers for control Foot controller CC 04 Bn 04 wv If the above CC is assigned as the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL function this message will be transmi
296. r performance When you reach the ending loca tion you specified in step recording will end Playback will continue Press the START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the loca tion you specified in step Loop All Tracks Make the necessary settings in Preparations for recording In the Preferences tab Recording Setup select Loop All Tracks However since multitrack recording is not possible the MultiRec check box must be unchecked Beer eg Sete Cheer write E Jiu Pah iu T er a GR Lap Al Track m te C Pimm Pach i In M_ M_ specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M004 M008 recording will occur repeatedly as a loop from measure 4 to measure 8 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 65 Basic functions Sequencer mode Press the REC WRITE key and then press the START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step you will return to the starting location and continue recording The musical data that is loop recorded will be added to the previously recorded data During loop recording you can pr
297. r using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing a track edit opera tion For example this can be used effectively when real time recording a track for a song Realtime record a track Take 1 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 Press the COMPARE key The LED will light and take 1 will be recalled Press the COMPARE key once again The LED will go dark and take 2 will be recalled If at step you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will now be take 1 If at step you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will be take 2 In this way the Compare function lets you recall the previous recording or the previous state of event edit ing amp h The Compare function is not available Sampling Song Play or Global modes 14 Popup buttons and popup menus You can press a popup button to access a popup menu and then set parameter values p 10 Keyboard input When inputting a note name or velocity value as the value of a parameter you can use the keyboard to input the setting Hold down the ENTER key and play the note that you wish to enter as a value The note name number or velocity value will be input When the Global P5 DrumKit page is displayed you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the settings that have b
298. rameter Guide MIDI Filter E MIDI CC 00 CC 95 can be selected for the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs Selecting program combination banks Bank select CC 00 CC 32 p 114 Program Change Bank Select Using the joystick to apply modulation Modulation 1 depth CC 01 Bn 01 wv When you move the TRITON s joystick in the Y direc tion away from yourself Modulation 1 Depth mes sages will be transmitted When these messages are received the same effect will be applied as when the TRITON s joystick is operated Normally this will apply a vibrato effect pitch LFO e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track P3 MIDI2 tab Enable JS Y p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide MIDI Filter Modulation 2 depth CC 02 Bn 02 wv When you move the TRITON s joystick in the Y direc tion toward yourself Modulation 2 Depth messages will be transmitted When these messages are received the same effect will be applied as when the TRITON s joystick is operated Normally this will apply a wah effect filter LFO e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track P3 MIDI2 tab Enable JS Y p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide MIDI Filter E Other manufacturers use this message for other purposes e g breath controller etc Controlling the portamento effect
299. ransmission reception and is set by Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel Combination mode e The global MIDI channel is used to transmit receive messages for selecting a combination and turning effects on off and to transmit receive exclusive data e The MIDI channel specified for each timbre in Combination P2 MIDI channel tab is used to transmit receive MIDI data for each timbre e The MIDI channel specified for each of the insert effects and master effects is used to control dynamic modulation and to control the pan and send 1 2 after the sound has passed through the insert effects e When you operate the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON messages will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will also be transmitted on the MIDI channel of any timbre whose Status is set to EXT or EX2 e Channel messages will be received if they match the MIDI channel of a timbre whose Status is set to INT p 33 in the Parameter Guide Status and MIDI Channel Sequencer mode and Song Play mode e The global MIDI channel is used to transmit receive exclusive data and for messages that switch effects on off e MIDI data of each track is transmitted received on the MIDI channel specified for each track in the Sequencer P2 MIDI Channel tab e The MIDI channel specified for each of the insert effects and master effects is used to control dynamic modulation and to control the pan and send 1 2 after t
300. record a rhythm pattern of four measures or more in realtime Alternatively you can place or copy one of the preset patterns When you are finished recording press the Ply Loop tab For track 1 check Track Play Loop Set Loop Start Measure to 001 and Loop End Mea sure to 004 SEQUENCER P Play REC PlayLoop 161 68 EMEKA 061 601 600 Meter 4 4 J 120 Manu gt S000 NEW SONG Reso P Hi _ RPPR Track Select El a 5 5 7 iFastSyniFastSuniFastSyniFastSyniFastSyn iF astSun Track Play Loop nee aain Loop Start Measure asiga p Loop End Measure the Ef Rs PERI Ags TOF TOI iter Miner PisLoop PluLoop rete Lice eee Ue ase erie renee Press the START STOP key to playback and track 1 will continue repeating measures 1 4 E In this case playback will end with the measures recorded in step 1 This is because the current length of the song is the number of measures that were recorded in step 1 The measure at which recording ended will be the current length of the song In some cases you will probably want to continue looping during playback so that you can rehearse the phrase that you will record next In this case you will need to specify the length of the song You can do this by executing the P5 Track Edit page menu command Insert Measure before you per form step D For example if you execute this com mand with the settings shown below the song length wil
301. refers to settings which cause two or more pro grams to sound simultaneously when a note is played Program B Layer Two or more programs sound simultaneously Split Split refers to settings which cause different programs to sound depending on the keyboard location that is played Progrn A Program A Program B rT ry p Split Il III Iil Il Iil Wi Wt Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard Velocity switch Velocity Switch refers to settings which cause different programs to sound depending on the velocity key board playing dynamics Progrfn B Strong Program A Soft Velocity Switch Keyboard playing dynamics d velocity switches between different programs On the TRITON you can use a different program for each of up to eight timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex set ups j Keyboard playing dynamics Progrfin A Program D Strong Program B Program C Soft f Keyboard playing dynamics Example B and C D are split In the lower keyboard range A and B are layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a
302. respond to each control change and how the TRITON will respond in each mode when these are received refer to TRITON operations when control changes are trans mitted received on p 223 of the Parameter Guide Low pass filter cutoff CC 74 Bn 4A vv Resonance level High pass filter cutoff CC 71 Bn 47 vv Filter EG intensity CC 79 Bn 4F vv Release time CC 72 Bn 48 wv These messages are transmitted when you operate the TRITON s REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs in A mode They can also be set as B mode functions Sustain level CC 70 Bn 46 vv Attack time CC 73 Bn 49 vv Decay time CC 75 Bn 4B wv LFO 1 speed CC 76 Bn 4C wv LFO 1 depth pitch CC 77 Bn 4D vv LFO 1 delay CC 78 Bn 4E vv These messages are transmitted when assign the above CC to the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs and operate them When you operate these the corresponding program parameters will be controlled and the sound and enve lope will change When these messages are received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated When the message has a value vv 64 40 the setting will have the value that was set by the pro gram parameter e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI Filter MIDI2 tab Enable REALTIME CONTROLS Knob 1 2 3 4 E In Program mo
303. ress the Add button Add files to the Jukebox list in the order that they will be played A maximum of 100 files 00 99 can be registered in the Jukebox list To delete a file from the Jukebox list press the Delete button Press the EXIT key to display P0 Play Mix Press the START STOP key The files will playback in the order in which they were registered Press the START STOP key once again to stop playback he Only files in the same directory can be registered in a jukebox list If you perform the following operations while cre ating a jukebox list the jukebox list will be lost 87 Basic functions Song Play mode e Change the directory e Remove the floppy disk e Change drives Saving a Jukebox list Saving procedure Use the procedure described above to create a jukebox list If the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed and you wish to save the list on a hard disk etc use the P3 Jukebox drive select button to select the drive in which you wish to save the data In P3 Jukebox select the Save Jukebox List page menu command Save Jukebox List MY_LIST JKB OK Cancel J Use the text edit button to enter a name for the jukebox list p 38 Press the OK button The jukebox list will be saved to the media Loading procedure In the Jukebox page select a jukebox list filename extension JKB Press the Load Jukebox List page
304. rmally this is used to control volume tone cutoff frequency or LFO sensitivity etc 27 Quick Start Using controllers to modify the sound Note Number An effect can be applied by the note number keyboard location that you play Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff frequency LFO sensitivity and EG sensitivity etc ES This can be used as a source for alternate modula tion or effect dynamic modulation to control pro gram parameters or effect parameters Foot pedals Damper Pedal A separately sold Korg switch type damper pedal such as the DS 1H can be connected to the TRITON If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal The half damper function cannot be controlled by other pedals Assignable Foot Switch A separately sold on off switch such as the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected to the TRITON allowing you to turn an assigned function on off by stepping on the foot switch The function of the foot switch is assigned in Global P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign ep 125 Assignable Foot Pedal A separately sold Korg expression pedal such as the EXP 2 orXVP 10 can be connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack and used to apply an effect The function of the foot pedal is assigned in Global mode P2 Controller Foot Pedal Assign p 125 ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob GATE knob VELOCITY knob These knobs control the effect of the arpeggiator in real
305. rn is assigned can be used for normal keyboard performance When you change Track Select the track played by the key board will change E If you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an external MIDI device use the MIDI channel that is selected for Track Select To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box RPPR performance techniques e Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of Beat or Measure will synchronize to the pattern playback of the first key For details refer to Sync on p 71 in the Parameter Guide e Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song Start song playback and then press the key The pattern playback will start in synchronization with the measures of the song Synchronization will be lost if you use the lt lt REW or FF gt gt keys while a song is playing E If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins E If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat o
306. rogram Attack Time Adjust the attack time of the filter EG and amp EG This will adjust the speed of the attack from note on he In order to maximize the effect of the Attack Time adjustment the amp EG Start Level Attack Level Start Level Modulation and Attack Time Modula tion parameters are also adjusted Decay Time Adjust the decay time and slope time of the filter EG and amp EG IFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the Wet Dry balance of all insert effects 1 5 The type of each insert effect is shown in the LCD screen MFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the Return 1 and 2 param eters of the master effects The type of each master effect is shown in the LCD screen Realtime controls These can be used to edit parameters such as the filter cutoff frequency resonance the amp and filter EG vol ume portamento time pan pitch LFO and master effect send level etc ep 26 Simple combination editing A combination is a set of multiple up to eight pro grams and allows you to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a single program You can edit a combination in Combination P1 Edit program Mixer P9 Edit Master Effect but can also make settings for Program Select Status Pan and Volume in Combination P0 Play as well kh If you wish to keep the results of your editing you must Write the combination into memory before selecting another comb
307. rograms 512 preset 256 9 drum ROM programs GM2 sound map compatible Drum Kits 64 user drum kits 16 presets 9 ROM GM drum kits GM2 sound map compati ble Dual polypnonic arpeggiator Use two arpeggiators simultaneously Combination Sequencer Song Play modes 5 preset arpeggio patterns 232 user arpeggio patterns 200 presets Sequencer 16 timbres 16 tracks 1 master track Maximum capacity 200 000 notes Resolution J 192 200 songs 20 cue lists 150 preset patterns 100 user patterns for each song 16 preset 16 user template songs Supports TRITON format and SMF formats 0 and 1 RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function One set is available for each one song Song play 16 timbres 16 tracks SMF formats 0 and 1 supported Disk mode Load save utility Data filter function save load MIDI exclusive data Loading from CD ROM ISO 9660 level1 is sup ported Keyboard TRITON prox 88 keys weighted TRITON pro 76 keys TRITON 61 keys Controllers Joystick ribbon controller SW1 SW2 keys REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and A B mode key VALUE slider ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY knobs and ON OFF key User interface TouchView graphical user interface 320 x 240 pixel LCD display VOLUME slider Mode keys COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPLING S PLAY GLOBAL DISK Value controllers VALUE slider A V keys VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9
308. rpeggio Patterns Write Arpeggio Patterns OK J Cancel To execute the Write operation press the OK but ton To cancel press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure Press the OK button once again to write the data Using the REC WRITE key to write In the following pages press the front panel REC WRITE key A dialog box will appear Global settings Global P0 P4 User drum kits Global P5 User arpeggio patterns Global P6 The example shown is for Update Arpeggio Patterns Update Arpeggio Patterns Are you sure OK J Cancel To execute the Write operation press the OK but ton To cancel press the Cancel button Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode memory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write the data in the memory area will be written into the global settings drum kits and arpeg gio patterns of internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area k Edit Memory Area When you Write the various When the power is turned Global mode settings wil
309. s 129 Installing and setting up the Korg MIDI Driver 129 Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into Windows 95 98 and making settings 129 Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into Windows 95 98 0 ccc cece eee ees 129 Korg MIDI Driver settings 130 Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver WindOWS e oi28es starrt eke ee sik eee 130 Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into a Ma cint0shiet s seats cate daticn tinatvokte ote Get 131 Setting up the Korg MIDI Driver Macintosh 00 cee ee eee 131 Wiring diagram for special connection cables ce sran ss saree EEE EEN RS 132 Troubleshooting 2 133 Specifications and options 135 Specifications a vasa heetiie en i EEE 135 Options s 232 cisiee sath wee co ete ete s a deed 136 MIDI implementation chart 137 INdOXe res Soil nncttee sion ea medal ake 138 Introducing the TRITON Main features Overview The TRITON is a music workstation sampler that fea tures the HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system as its tone generator It provides high quality preset multisamples pro grams combinations and an effect section and func tionality such as sampling sequencer song play dual polyphonic arpeggiator RPPR and two audio inputs and six audio outputs Arich array of controllers such as the joystick ribbon controller SW1 SW2 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE
310. s you can record up to four mono samples of 2 minutes 54 seconds for a total of 11 minutes 39 seconds of sampling For more on the sampling features of the TRITON p 75 Sequencer The TRITON provides a high performance 16 track MIDI sequencer with more than sufficient power for use as a stand alone sequencer The sequencer can serve as the core that brings together the TRITON s numerous capabilities allowing it to serve as an inte grated music workstation sampler For more on the TRITON s sequencer p 58 Song Play In Song Play mode SMF Standard MIDI File data can be played back directly from a floppy disk or SCSI device when the separately sold EXB SCSI is installed You can play along on the keyboard as you listen to the SMF playback and even play the arpeg giator in synchronization with the playback tempo of the SMF e Formats 0 and 1 are supported e A jukebox function lets you edit the order in which songs are played back Dual polyphonic arpeggiator e Five preset arpeggio patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 RANDOM and 232 user arpeggio patterns are provided With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preset user patterns In addition to providing conventional arpeggiator functionality the polyphonic arpeggiator of the TRI TON can respond to the pitches or timing at which you play the keyboard and produce a diverse range of chords or phrases This can be used to play a vari ety of drum
311. s in other modes p 109 4 Connecting pedals etc Foot pedal connections A foot pedal controls etc Connect a separately sold Korg assignable pedal such as the XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the rear panel ASSIGN ABLE PEDAL jack The function controlled by the foot pedal is specified in Global P2 Foot Pedal Assign p 125 p121 220 in the Parameter Guide Foot switch connections A foot switch controls sostenuto soft pedal on off arpeggiator on off to select programs or combina tions and to start stop the sequencer etc Connect a separately sold Korg foot switch such as the PS 1 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack The function that will be controlled by the foot switch and the polarity of the foot switch can be set in Global P2 Foot Switch Assign and Foot Switch Polarity p 125 p 121 219 in the Parameter Guide Damper pedal connections A damper pedal applies a damper effect as you play Connect a separately sold Korg DS 1H damper pedal to the DAMPER jack of the TRITON If a DS 1H is con nected half damper effects can be produced The polarity of the pedal is set in Global P1 Damper Pedal Polarity and the sensitivity is set in Global P1 Half Damper Calibration p 115 121 in the Parame ter Guide 5 Connections to MIDI equip ment The keyboard controllers and sequencer of the TRI TON control and play an external MIDI tone generator and an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer pl
312. s on handling a floppy disk and inserting it into the disk drive refer to Disk mode p 95 Press the DISK key the LED will DISK light E You will enter Disk mode Press the Load tab The Load window will appear and file information will be displayed Press PRELOAD SNG The display will be highlighted This is the demo song data Press the page menu command button The page menu commands will be displayed Press Load selected A dialog box will appear Press the check boxes to add a check mark Check Load PRELOAD PCG too When the data is loaded the PCG file will be loaded along with the SNG file Check Load PRELOAD KSC too When the data is loaded the KSC file will be loaded along with the SNG file The Select KSC Allocation radio buttons specify how the sample data will be loaded into sample memory For this example select Clear Load PRELOAD SNG Y Load PRELOAD PCG too Y Load PRELOAD KSC too Select KSC Allocation O Append Clear Cancel OK If you load with Select KSC Allocation set to Clear the sample data will be loaded from the beginning of the sample memory area If you load with Select KSC Allocation set to Append the sample data will be loaded into the unused portion of the sample memory he If sample memory already contains sample data that you do not wish to lose
313. s or combinations by bank e Multisample Select Select a multisample for a program oscillator by category ROM multisamples only e Category Effect Select Select an insert effect or master effect by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button e Category popup button When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the fol lowing selections e Category Program Select Category Combination Select Select programs or combinations by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button Check box Each time you press a check box a check mark will be added or removed When checked the parameter will function when unchecked the parameter will not function Radio buttons Press a radio button to select one value from two or more choices Tab Press the tab to select a page Page menu button When this button is pressed a list of page menu commands will appear The page menu commands that appear will depend on the page that is selected You can also select up to ten page menu com mands by holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 The page menu will close when you press the LCD screen at a location other than the page menu or when you press the EXIT key Dialog box The dialog box that appears will depend on the page menu command that you select When
314. s the START STOP key to begin playback from the step speci fied in Current Step Intro measures 1 4 gt Intro measures 5 8 A measures 9 16 A measures 17 24 A mea sures 25 32 A measures 33 40 gt Bridge mea sures 41 48 Bridge measures 49 56 Ending measures 57 60 e The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List page menu command e If you wish to use the tempo that is specified by the song of each step set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu manual playback will use the tempo that you specify in J e Ifyou specify Continue to Step01 for the last step the cue list will continue playing back repeatedly e If you set Repeat to FS a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack will control the timing at which the song stops repeating Set Foot Switch Assign Global P2 Controller to Cue Repeat Control e When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the program specified for the currently playing song will sound Converting a cue list to a song Although it is not possible to record additional mate rial onto tracks in a cue list you can convert a cue list to a song and then record solos etc to vacant tracks You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you wish to save it on a floppy disk as SMF data
315. se numeric keys 0 9 and 10 s HOLD to input tones The Tone No corresponds to the 0 9 and 10 s HOLD keys as shown below Each time you press a 0 9 or 10 s HOLD key the corresponding tone will be turned on off The horizontal lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the tones Tone00 09 0 9 keys Tone10 key Tone11 10 s HOLD key Creating an example pattern Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Step No to 02 and press the 1 key Set Step No to 03 and press the 2 key Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 key Set Step No to 05 and press the 3 key Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 key Set Step No to 07 and press the 2 key Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 key 101 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings You can also select Step No by using the A VW keys the VALUE slider the VALUE dial or the popup menu When you play the keyboard as shown in the illus tration the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchecked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play For steps 01 08 make settings for Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam Pitch Offset This offse
316. se times of the filter and amp 27 Filter EG intensity 27 Filter EG 49 Filter LFO Mod 49 Floppy disk 92 94 95 Foot Pedal 28 Foot Switch 28 Format 94 Format 0 Format 1 85 G GM system on 120 GM GS XG 86 123 Grid 82 H Hard disk 92 HI Hyper Integrated synthesis sys tem 1 High pass filter 27 48 l IBM PC compatible 112 If notes are stuck 121 Index 81 Input guitar instrument 78 Insert button 11 Insert Effect IFX 34 44 51 57 79 106 107 108 109 125 J Joystick 25 116 Amount of pitch change 47 Lock function 25 Vibrato effect 47 116 Wah effect 49 116 Jukebox 87 Jukebox list Load 88 Save 88 K Key Sync 97 Key Zone 56 Keyboard 31 32 97 Keyboard amp Index 82 Keyboard crossfade 54 Keyboard input 14 Keyboard Track 48 KMP file KMP 93 94 Korg MIDI Driver 129 130 KSC file KSC 93 94 KSF file KSF 93 94 L Latch 97 Layer 54 56 LCD screen 17 Level Amp Level 34 AUDIO INPUT 109 OSC Balance 34 LFO 47 48 50 Load PCG file 92 Disk 94 Floppy disk included with EXB PCM series option 94 Jukebox List 88 Local Control 112 LOCATE 62 Lock 25 Loop All Track 65 Loop sample 82 Low pas Resonance 48 Low pass amp High pass 48 Low pass filter 48 LPF CUTOFF 26 M Macintosh 113 Manual punch in 65 Manual sampling 79 Master EQ MEQ Combination Sequencer Song Play 109 Program 106 108 Sampling 109 Media 92 Memory protect 37 Metronome 64 6
317. sed to cyclically modulate the pitch the vibrato effect LFO Intensity specifies the amount of pitch change that the LFO will produce With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from yourself AMS Intensity specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when an AMS alternate modu lation source is operated For example if AMS is set to After Touch vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard Pitch EG tab Here you can make settings for the pitch EG When you wish to create sound effects etc set the pitch EG to make major changes in pitch over time To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the pitch EG to cre ate a subtle change in pitch at the attack p 10 in the Parameter Guide EG and LFO When controlling the pitch filter and amplifier the EG envelope generator and LFO low frequency oscilla tor are used to create time varying and cyclical changes EG Envelope Generator The TRITON provides a Pitch EG Filter EG and Amplifier EG which produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively note on Attack Level a Break Level note off Level Release Level Sustain Level
318. set programs refer to the separate Voice Name List The Performance Edit tab e Here you can view the insert master effect settings the functions of SW1 SW2 keys and the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 e You can use the performance editor to adjust the major parameters of Program P1 P9 p 34 or Performance Edit on p 2 in the Parameter Guide If you wish to save the program settings that you 43 Basic functions Program mode modify using the performance editor you must turn off memory protect in Global mode p 37 and write the program p 38 The Arpeggio tab e Use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn the arpeggiator on off e You can select arpeggio patterns and edit arpeggiator parameters in realtime while you play e You can use the ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE and VELOCITY knobs to control the tempo of the arpeggio the note length and the strength of the notes For details refer to Using the arpeggiator while you play p 29 How a program is organized A program consists of the many parameters of P1 P9 The diagram below shows the structure of a program Sound has three aspects pitch tone and volume On the TRITON the Pitch Filter and Amplifier blocks which make up a program correspond to these three aspects of sound In other words adjust the Pitch sec tion to modify the pitch adjust the Filter section to modify the tone and adjust the Amplifier sect
319. ssigned he Although you may operate controllers etc to record control data in a pattern you should restore the control data to its normal value within the pat tern If you fail to restore the normal value unnec essary control data may remain in a stuck position when you place the pattern in a song or use the RPPR function to play the pattern How ever the following control data will be automati cally reset to the following values when the song or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern or when playback is halted Controller Reset value Modulation 1 CC 01 00 zero Modulation 2 CC 02 00 zero Expression CC 1 1 127 max Ribbon controller CC 16 64 center Damper switch CC 64 00 zero Sostenuto switch CC 66 00 zero Soft switch CC 67 00 zero EG sustain level CC 70 64 center Resonance level CC 71 64 center EG release time CC 72 64 center EG attack time CC 73 Low pass filter cutoff CC 74 EG decay level CC 75 LFO1 speed CC 76 LFO1 depth pitch CC 77 LFO1 delay CC 78 Filter EG intensity CC 79 SW1 modulation CC 80 SW1 modulation CC 81 Channel after touch Pitch bender Step recording on a track or pattern To step record on a track use the P5 Track Edit Track Edit tab page menu command Step Recording To step record on
320. t Master Effect Individual Output p gt Master Effect 1 2 P9 AUDIO OUTPUT Insert Effect 1 5 te MasterEQ P9 m ONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 lt 4 Oscillator Pitch Filter gt lt _ Ampilfi er Effect _ _ aAN lt i P1 1 and P2 2 etc indicate the page tab screens used when editing on the TRITON 44 Basic program editing Program editing refers to the process of modifying the parameters that make up a program to vary the sound or to set controllers etc General program editing can be performed using the performance editor of Program P0 Play or using the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 but detailed editing is performed in Program P1 P9 Use the parameters of P1 P9 to edit the program that you selected in Program P0 Play In this section we will give examples of how to modify representative parameters in each page so that you can understand the operation of each parameter For details on all parameters refer to in the Parameter Guide E For parameters in P1 P5 that are set indepen dently for each oscillator 1 and 2 you can use the page menu command Copy Oscillator to copy settings from one oscillator to the other This is a convenient way to make the same settings for two oscillators or to copy settings from one oscillator to the other he If you wish to save a
321. ta that you recorded are not backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on a floppy disk or external SCSI device if the separately sold EXB SCSI option is installed before turning off the power or perform a MIDI data dump to save the data on an external data filer etc If you wish to save the programs track parameters and effects etc selected for a song as a template song use the page menu command Save as User Template Song Immediately after the power is turned on the TRI TON will not contain any cue list data or song data so if you wish to playback a song on the sequencer you must first load data from floppy disk or receive a MIDI data dump from an external MIDI sequencer p 40 92 p 119 in the Param eter Guide Features of the sequencer The sequencer lets you record a maximum of 200 000 events note data etc up to 200 songs and as many as 999 measures per song Up to 20 cue lists can be created A cue list is an arrangement of up to 99 songs that will be played as a chain You can specify the num ber of times that each song will repeat Songs ina cue list can also be converted into a single song The RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function can be used for playback or recording The dual polyphonic arpeggiator can be used for playback or recording Sixteen different template songs are built in and contain program and effect settings suitable for various musical styles Up to sixteen
322. tched on or off When on the LED will light The selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you play the keyboard The on off setting is saved when the program is written into memory amp When Arpeggiator Assign is Off turning it on will not make the arpeggiator operate if Arpeg giator Run are unchecked Arpeggiator settings Select any desired programs for the timbres 1 4 that we will be using as an example here Select Combination P1 Edit Program Mixer Select any desired programs for the timbres 1 4 that we will be using as an example here In Combination P2 Edit Trk Param select the MIDI Channel tab For the timbres that you will be using set Status to INT and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel For this example set timbres 1 4 to a Status of INT and timbres 5 8 to a Status of Off Set the MIDI Channel of timbres 1 4 to Gch COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch aa Bank A Combination AAAG Kaso forsan Teel Mal Strings Mocal Aii uj Status parara Bank Select When Status EX2 5 ect Organ Bell Mall Strings iMocal Ai Brass i H Arpeggiator Assign a nE me EAE Bon ho Set the ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program p 96 However the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B Make Arpeggiator Assign
323. th the TRITON s internal sounds e In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs the TRITON provides four individual audio outputs for a total of six channels of audio output The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insertion effect can be routed freely to any output TouchView user interface The TRITON uses a TouchView user interface that lets you operate the instrument by directly touching a large 320 x 240 pixel LCD screen for a revolutionary leap in ease of operation and user friendliness When selecting programs combinations multisamples drumsamples or effects in the LCD screen you can also view and select by categories such as types of instrument Overview of the modes The TRITON has a large number of functions that let you play and edit programs and combinations record and play sequence data record and play back samples and manage data on disk The largest unit used to organize these functions is called amode The TRITON has seven modes Program mode e Select and play programs You can choose programs from rewritable banks A B C D Eand F which contain a total of 768 pro grams and non rewritable bank G 256 programs compatible with the GM2 standard and nine drum programs The 128 programs of bank F can be selected only if the EXB MOSS option has been installed e Edit a program Make settings for the oscillator filter amp EG LFO effects and arpeggiator Select a mult
324. the Copy Insert Effect page menu command to copy effect settings from another pro gram etc Also you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange for example IFX1 and IFX5 Make Chain settings If the Chain check box is checked the insert effect will be connected in series Since the output of the oscillator is being sent to IFX1 in making settings as shown in the diagram would connect all five insertion effects IFX1 IFX2 gt IFX3 gt IFX4 gt IFX5 in series so that these effects would be inserted into the output of the oscillator O Make settings for Pan BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the sound after it has passed through the insert effects If the insertion effects are chained these settings will apply after the last IFX Pan Set the pan This is valid only when BUS Sel is L R BUS Sel BUS Select Specify the output destina tion Normally you will set this to L R If you wish to send the sound that has passed through the insert effects to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 select 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 107 Basic functions Effects settings Send 1 Send 2 Set the send levels to the master effects For this example set this to 127 Select the IFX1 5 tabs and set the parameters for each of the selected effects For details on the parameters of each effect p 155 in the Parameter Guide Master effects
325. the selected category in the LCD screen For the drumsample names refer to the separate Voice Name List Voice Mixer tab Exclusive Group Make this setting when you want to group related drumsamples together For example if the KEY to which a open hi hat and a closed hi hat drumsample are assigned are set to the same exclusive group number they will be grouped so that the open hi hat and closed hi hat can not be sounded simultaneously ensuring that the hi hat per formance will sound natural Basic functions BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign The drumsample assigned to the KEY can be sent to an insert effect or to one of the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks For example you can specify IFX1 for snare drums and IFX2 for kick drums so that different types of drums are sent to insert effects 1 and 2 Alternatively you can set this to 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 so that only specific drum sounds are sent to the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVID UAL 1 4 jacks These settings are valid if Use DKit Setting Program P8 Routing tab is checked in the Routing tab of Pro gram P8 for the program that uses this drum kit p 24 147 148 in the Parameter Guide Global mode Pan This sets the panning This setting is valid if Use DKit Setting Program P4 Amp1 Lv1 Pan tab is checked Send 1 MFX1 Send 2 MFX2 These set the send levels to the master effects This set ting is valid if Use DKit Setting Program
326. the arpeggiator performance in realtime use Track Select to choose a track that uses the global MIDI channel When you play the keyboard it will sound in the same way as for the combination When you per form multitrack recording the multiple channels that are sounded by the arpeggiator will be recorded in the same way However in the case of multi track recording when multiple tracks are set to the same MIDI channel this musical data will be combined Quantize The TRITON provides a realtime quantize Reso resolution setting see step p 64 that lets you correct the timing of musical data as it is being recorded and a Quantize function a P5 Track Edit page menu command that lets you correct the timing of musical data that has already been input For example suppose that during realtime recording you intended to play eighth notes but that the rhythm was slightly inaccurate as shown in figure 1 below In such cases you could set Reso resolution to D so that when you realtime record the notes will automat ically be adjusted to the correct timing as shown in fig ure 2 Alternatively if data that was recorded without using realtime quantize plays back as shown in figure 1 you could select the P5 Track Edit page menu command Quantize set its Resolution parameter to and press the OK button to correct the timing as shown in figure 2
327. the first time so proceed to step Press the REC WRITE key You will be in recording standby condition Start the external sequencer The TRITON s sequencer will receive the MIDI Start message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically begin recording When the song ends stop the external sequencer The TRITON s sequencer will receive the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically stop recording You can also press the START STOP key on the TRITON itself to stop recording When simultaneously recording multiple tracks using the RPPR function You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously record the playback of multiple tracks that are being triggered by the RPPR function For the procedure refer to Realtime recording an RPPR performance p 73 Using the Track Play Loop function to record The Track Play Loop function lets you specify a range of measures over which each track 1 16 will loop repeatedly during playback As an example we will describe how you can use the Track Play Loop function to efficiently record tracks This is a convenient way to create a basic rhythm sec tion Here we will explain the procedure of using the Track Play Loop function to playback a drum track and a bass track while you record synth phrases Record a drum phrase on track 1 Select a drum program for track 1 Set Track Select to Track 01 and
328. the pitch including the pitch EG P3 Edit Filter Settings related to the filter tone including the filter EG P4 Edit Amp Settings related to the amplifier vol ume including amp EG and pan Edit Common LFO For each of the two LFO s provided for each oscillator select the LFO type and speed etc Settings in the pitch filter and amp pages will determine how deeply the LFO that you specify here is applied Edit Arpeggiator Settings for the arpeggiator Some of these are shared with the arpeggiator settings of PO and you may edit them in either location Edit Insert Effect Select insert effects and make set tings for them Specify the oscillator routing send levels to the insert effects master effects and indepen dent outputs Edit Master Effect Select master effects and make set tings for them Make settings for the master EQ he If the separately sold EXB MOSS has been installed you will be able to use bank F The page structure and parameter structure of bank F pro grams is different than for the programs of other banks Refer to the owner s manual for the EXB MOSS When it is shipped from the factory the TRITON is loaded with a variety of preset programs You can cre ate your own programs by modifying these factory preset programs or by creating original programs from scratch You can also create original programs using sample waveforms and multisamples that
329. the sound The LOCATE key lets you move quickly to a desired location e The Track BPM Adjust function playback pitch adjust can automatically change the pitch of a sample multisample that was sampled in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode so that it matches the tempo About song data The following two types of song data can be loaded from floppy disk or other external media into the TRI TON s sequencer e Song data saved in the TRITON s own format This data cannot be loaded by another device but the playback will faithfully reproduce the detailed settings unique to the TRITON We recommend that song data intended for playback on the TRITON be saved in this format e Standard MIDI Files This format is not able to provide a totally faithful reproduction of the performance on the TRITON in the way that the TRITON s own format does although there will be no problem for normal play back but does provide compatibility with other SMF compatible devices To load song data from floppy disk or save song data to floppy disk use Disk mode p 40 p 92 Memory Protect Before you record a track or pattern or edit the musical data you will need to turn off the memory protect set ting in Global mode p 37 The Compare function When you perform realtime recording step recording or track editing this function allows you make before and after comparisons p 14 If you continue editing when the COMPARE key
330. time For details on the operation refer to p 29 Using the arpeggiator while you play 28 Using the arpeggiator while you play The arpeggiator is a function that automatically gener ates arpeggios broken chords Most arpeggiators pro duce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard The chord you played on the keyboard is sounded as an arpeggio broken chord In addition to this the TRITON s arpeggiator is a poly phonic arpeggiator that is able to produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play on the keyboard These functions let you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases and guitar or keyboard backing riffs It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of the sound creating pro cess when creating subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects In addition the TRITON features a Dual Arpeggiator that lets you simultaneously use two arpeggio patterns in Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode You can take advantage of this in many ways such as applying separate arpeggio patterns toa drums program and a bass program or using key board split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns The TRITON provides five preset arpeggio patterns the standard UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RAN DOM and lets you program and store 232 user arpeg
331. to JS X amp Ribbon Lock JS Y amp Ribbon Lock or JS Y Ribbon Lock both locking functions will apply simultaneously After touch When the SW1 or SW2 key function is set to After Touch Lock the sound produced by applying pressure to the keyboard can be held even after the keyboard is released When the SW1 key is set to After Touch Lock and is operating as a Toggle switch the lock function can be used as described in the following example After playing a note apply pressure to the key board after touch The sound will change While maintaining the pressure on the keyboard press SW1 the SW1 key LED will light 26 Even when you apply further pressure to the key board the sound at the moment you pressed SW1 key will be held This is the locked condition To release the locked condition press the SW1 key once again Realtime control knobs 1 2 3 4 These knobs can be used to control the filter cutoff fre quency and resonance the amp and filter EG volume portamento time pan pitch LFO or the send levels to the master effects etc Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to switch the function of the realtime controllers to A mode or B mode Each time you press the key A mode or B mode will be selected alternately and the corresponding LED will light REALTIME CONTROLS _ Tha s lectad moda Zoe LPF CUTOFF _RESONANCE HPF_EG
332. ts the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Pitch Off set value for each to create a melody using a single tone Melody pattern Gate Specify the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of Legato the note will continue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a set ting of Off the note will not sound Velocity Specify the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength with which it was actually played he The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parame ters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup tab of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the settings in Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Be sure to verify the settings of the program Set the Gate and Velocity by using the ARPEGGIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the center position 12 o clock PROGRAM P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup i Arpeggiator Tempo J 120 Arpeggiator Setup seu Pattern P U199 A B Octave Resolution D Y sort V Key Sync Velocity Step _
333. tted when the controller is operated 117 Basic functions MIDI applications e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI2 tab Enable Foot Pedal Switch Ribbon controller CC 16 Bn 10 wv This message will be transmitted when the TRITON s ribbon controller is operated e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI2 tab Enable Ribbon Controller CC 18 Bn 12 vv This message will be transmitted when the TRITON s VALUE slider is operated This is valid in Program P0 Play and Combination P0 Play when the program or combination number name is selected highlighted Knob modulation 1 2 3 4 CC 17 19 20 21 Bn 11 vv Bn 13 vv Bn 14 vv Bn 15 vv If the above CC are assigned to the B mode of REAL TIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs these messages will be transmitted when the knobs are operated e In Combination and Sequencer modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track p 35 57 in the Parameter Guide P3 MIDI3 tab Enable REALTIME CONTROLS Knob 1 2 3 4 Controller CC 83 Bn 53 vv If the above CC is assigned to the B mode of REAL TIME CONTR
334. tup set PC I F Baud Rate to 31 25 kBPS PC I F Baud Rate settings If you will be installing the Korg MIDI Driver p 131 Installing the Korg MIDI Driver into a Macintosh PC I F Baud Rate settings Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode Press the MENU key and then press the EXIT key to enter P0 Basic Setup Press the System Pref tab Press the PC I F Baud Rate popup button and select the setting that is appropriate for your com puter 31 25 kBPS Connection to an Apple Macintosh 34 80 kBPS Connection to an IBM PC compatible GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference Mk fuzz System Preference Bank Map Pema Power On Mode D Reset PC I F Baud Rate O 1 25 kBPs U Beep Enable pmm Memory Protect oO Program Q Drum Kit oO Combination oO Song im Arpeggio User Pattern 113 Basic functions MIDI applications Messages transmitted and received by the TRITON indicates hexadecimal notation MIDI channels MIDI messages can be exchanged when the transmit ting and receiving devices are set to the same MIDI channel MIDI uses sixteen channels numbered 1 16 The way in which channels are handled will differ depending on the mode Program mode and Sampling mode e Transmission reception is performed on the global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is the basic channel that the TRITON uses for MIDI t
335. uencer Mode 6 6 cece eee eee 19 3 Playing a cue list ss sisusse 0 cece eee eee 20 Selecting and playing a program 21 Selecting a program 1 6 6 cece eee eee 21 Selecting and playing a combination 23 Selecting a combination 000005 23 Using controllers to modify the sound 25 Joystick i a aara Geese goer HS 25 iv Ribbon controller onnaa 0 00 cece eee ee 25 SWL SWZ a re ois aeaa ae chs eee EN 25 The Lock function 0 00 cece eee eee 25 Realtime control knobs 1 2 3 4 26 A mode controls 00 ce cece eee eens 26 B mode controls 00 00 c eee eee eee 27 VALUE slider 0 00 cee cece eens 27 Keyboard wie ict Cun tein tanta d we tities 27 FOOt pedalsiiic e225 Ga eee Yale et ees ee a 28 ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob GATE knob VELOCITY knob 00 00 00008 28 Using the arpeggiator while you play 29 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 29 Settings using controllers 4 29 Settings in the LCD screen 5 30 Using the arpeggiator as you play in Combination Mod n maraig enh HA Ea A ee Ate 31 Settings in the LCD screen 4 31 Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Re cording function eee secon 33 Simple program editing 34 Performance Edit 0 0 0 cece cece eee 34 Realtime controls 0 00 c cece eee ee
336. ul not to raise the volume excessively When sampling in Sampling mode or when you wish to apply the TRITON s effects to an external audio source in Program Combination Sequencer or Song 1 F Power switch Headphones to an AC outlet a l gt T z O PHONES Power cable included En 7 3 AC power supply inlet es AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ASSIGNABLE LEVEL UINDIVDUALY MAN DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL 2 1 MAXMN MCUNE 4 1 R L MONO Headphones ri o 0 000 0 0 O c E Ele o S5ssec0 SSC OUTPUT iE Fst CD player analog record player etc 7 If you connect a guitar with passive pickups i e a guitar which does not contain a preamp it will not be possible to sample at an appropriate level due to the INPUT impedance mismatch Please route the guitar signal through a preamp 00n or an effect processor Effect processor etc OC TUITION TO Powered monitors etc 15 Introduction Connections Play mode and output the sound from the OUTPUT jacks connect a mic or an external audio source to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks For details on connections when sampling in Sam pling mode p 78 For details on connections when outputting from the OUTPUT jack
337. using the front panel VALUE controllers VALUE slider A 7 keys VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9 key ENTER key and 10 s HOLD key As neces sary you can also use the BANK keys and the COM PARE key For some parameters the value can be set by pressing a popup button to display the popup menu and then selecting a parameter value or by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard to input a note number or velocity value VALUE controllers VALUE slider Use this when you wish to make major changes in the value In Program mode and Combination mode this slider can also be used as a control source for alternate modu lation or dynamic modulation This is active in Pro gram or Combination P0 Play when the Program Number name or Combination Number name the large characters in the upper part of the LCD is selected AI V keys Use these when you wish to make small changes in the value VALUE dial Use this when you wish to make large changes in a value Numeric keys 0 9 ENTER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these when you know the parameter value that you wish to input After using the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number press the ENTER key to finalize the parameter value Use the key to enter negative numbers Use the 10 s HOLD key to enter a decimal point In Program and Combination mode P0 Play the 10 s HOLD key
338. ved This is because tracks that contain no musical data are omitted and the remaining tracks are moved into the unused tracks This will not affect the playback itself e If song data that was saved by another device as a format 1 SMF file is loaded into the TRITON the track configuration may be different than it was before being saved This is because tracks that contain no musical data are omitted and the remaining tracks are moved into the unused tracks This will not affect the playback itself When exchanging sequence data between two TRI TON series instruments we recommend that you save the sequence data in the TRITON s native format Save SEQ When sequence data is saved in the TRITON s native format all of the settings and patterns unique to the TRITON will be saved which will ensure a higher level of reproducibility than when the data is saved as a Standard MIDI File Save to Std MIDI File 124 Other functions Tuning to another instrument Transposing When you play the TRITON together with other instruments or along with music on a CD or tape you may need to adjust the tuning so that the pitch matches To adjust the tuning use Global P0 Basic tab Master Tune The tuning can be adjusted in a range of 50 50 cents one semitone is 100 cents You can also transpose by changing the pitch in semi tone steps To transpose the pitch of the entire TRI TON use Global P0 Basic ta
339. will have its top right corner bent over By pressing one of the pages shown you can move to that page You can also move to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 When you press the EXIT key PO will be dis played Other objects To modify the parameter value of an object shaped like a slider or knob press it to move the edit cell to that object and use the VALUE controllers to modify the value In addition there are also but tons similar to the OK button and Cancel button explained in dialog box which execute an oper ation when they are pressed and released such as the Done button Copy button and Insert button Toggle buttons This type of button will change its function or switch on off each time it is pressed aw PLAY MUTE REC button in Sequencer and Song Play mode Ev SOLO ON OFF button in Sequencer and Song Play mode Ca ON OFF button for Insert Effect and Master Effect 11 Introduction jects in the LCD screen Names and functions of ob Basic operation of the TRITON 1 Selecting modes In order to use a particular function on the TRI TON you must first select the appropriate mode Press one of the front panel mode keys COMBI key DISK key to enter the corresponding mode COMBI key Combination mode PROG key Program mode SEQ key Sequencer mode SAMPLING key Sampling mode S PLAY key Song Play mode G
340. x If this is checked the multisample will be played back ward This can produce interesting results when used on sound effects etc Normally you will not check this When Oscillator Mode Double To use OSC2 set Oscillator Mode to Double in the Program Basic tab In the same way as for OSC1 you can set High and Low multisamples for OSC2 The playback pitch can be set independently By using the same multisample with slightly different Tune settings you can detune the oscillators to produce a richer sound E It will be convenient to use the page menu com mand Copy Oscillator to make the oscillator set tings match each other 46 When Oscillator Mode Drums PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic rum Ki In the Program Basic tab set Oscillator Mode to Drums When this is set to Drums you will be able to create a drum program This will select a drum kit instead of a multisample The TRITON provides sixteen factory preset drum kits that are suitable for a wide variety of music For the drum kit names refer to the separate Voice Name List Here you can only select a drum kit To edit or create a drum kit use Global P5 Drum Kit ep 90 Velocity Zone tab PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Yelocity Zone Za OSC1 2 Yelocity Zone mmm OSC1 Top 127 OSC1 Bottom 681 OSC2 Top 127 OSC2 Bottom Here you can specify the range of velocities that will sound oscillators 1 and 2 In the e
341. xample shown above the velocity ranges are as follows e OSC1 will sound for all velocity values e OSC2 will sound only for strongly played notes 64 and above e You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in addition to this About High Low For this example set OSC1 in Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi to 032 and OSC2 to 096 The settings are shown as horizontal lines in the velocity zone display In this example the multisamples will sound over four levels Velocity values 001 031 sound only the OSC1 Low multisample Velocity values 032 063 sound only the OSC1 High multisample Velocity values 064 095 sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2 Low multisample Velocity values 096 127 sound the OSC1 High multisample and the OSC2 High multisample Controller Setup tab For each program this tab lets you make settings for the SW1 and SW2 keys and for the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 127 p 8 217 218 in the Parameter Guide P2 Edit Pitch Pitch settings Here you can specify how the pitch of the multisample selected for the oscillator will change Pitch EG and LFO settings allow the pitch to varied over time When the OSC Mode is Single or Drums only the OSC1 P Mod tab is available OSC Pitch Mod tab paz Pitch azz Pitch Slope B Ribbon 00 JS X 02 pm Pitch EG m z Intensity 00 00 AMS Intensity 00 00 pPortamento LFO 1 2z JEnable L
342. ying velocities dynamics Each curve has its own character so you can select the curve that is appropri ate for your own playing dynamics playing style and the effect that you wish to obtain p 113 114 in the Parameter Guide Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode After pressing the MENU key and press the P0 Basic Setup Select the Basic tab To change the velocity curve select Velocity Curve and specify the desired curve To change the after touch curve select After Touch Curve and specify the desired curve Ep If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 39 This setting will affect the operation of the entire TRITON Each program has parameters that allow you to adjust the effect of velocity playing dynamics and the change will depend on the settings of these parameters These parameters can be individually set in detail in Program mode 126 Creating original scales You can create your own original scales You can create sixteen different User Octave Scales in which the pitch of each note in the octave is repeated for all octaves and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each of the 128 notes can be specified independently 5 If you want this setting to be preserved after the power is turned off save the setting p 39 The user scales you create here can be used by specify ing the scale for a program for each

Korg Speaker System Speaker System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents